BS-400 Operation Manual Eng (v1.5)

BS-400
Chemistry Analyzer
Operator’s Manual
© 2007 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Operator’s Manual, the issued Date is 2007-09 (Version: 1.5).
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual.
This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not
convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others.
Mindray does not assume any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or
other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaption and translation of
this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is
strictly forbidden.
, , , , , BeneView, WATO,
BeneHeart, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in
China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used
only for editorial purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are
the property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be
liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this
product, only if:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
WARNING
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this
equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan.
Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.
i
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any
transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the
use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than
Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or
accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to
Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:
1 Return authorization: Contact the Customer Service Department and obtain
a Customer Service Authorization number. This number must appear on the
outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if
the number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial
number, and a brief description of the reason for return.
2 Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this
product is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
3 Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered
by the Customer Service department
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan, ShenZhen518057, P.R. China
Tel: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
EC Representative
Name: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH (Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, Hamburg 20537, Germany
Phone: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
ii
Foreword
Thank you for purchasing the chemistry analyzer.
Before using the chemistry analyzer, please read this operation manual thoroughly
and understand it for best performance.
Please keep this manual properly for convenient use.
Who Should Read This Manual

This manual is geared for clinical professionals to:
Perform daily operating tasks;

Maintain and troubleshoot the analyzer;
Learn about the analyzer hardware and software.
WARNING
The analyzer is to be operated only by clinical professionals, doctors or
laboratory experimenters trained by our company or our authorized
distributors.
What Can You Find in This Manual

This manual covers principles, basic operating instructions, maintenance and
troubleshooting guidelines of the analyzer. Please operate and troubleshoot the
system strictly as instructed by this manual.
Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following typographical conventions to clarify meanings in the
text.
Bold font indicates a chapter title, such as 5 Service and Maintenance
Bold and Italic font indicates text displayed on the screen, such as Sample
Request.
Safety Symbols
This chart explains the symbols used in this manual.
When you see… Then…

Read the statement following the symbol. The
WARNING statement is alerting you to an operating hazard
that can cause personal injury.
Foreword 1
BIOHAZARD statement is alerting you to a potentially
biohazardous condition.

CAUTION statement is alerting you to a possibility of system
damage or unreliable results.

NOTE statement is alerting you to information that
requires your attention.
Labels Used On the System

The labels attached to the panels of the system use symbols to clarify the meaning of
the text. If any of the labels becomes vague or peels off, contact our customer service
department or your local distributor for replacement. The chart below explains the
symbols on the labels.
Serial Number
Date of Manufacture
Manufacturer
CE marking. The device is fully in conformity with the Council

Directive Concerning In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices
98/79/EC.
Authorized Representative in the European Community
The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU

member states only: The use of this symbol indicates that this
product should not be treated as household waste. By ensuring
that this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent
bringing potential negative consequences to the environment
and human health. For more detailed information with regard to
returning and recycling this product, please consult the
distributor from whom you purchased the product.
In Vitro diagnostic equipment
Biohazard warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection
Warning: Risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Warning: risk of burn
2 Foreword
Caution: laser radiation
Protective ground terminal
ON (Main Power)
OFF (Main Power)
ON (Power)
OFF (Power)
Serial Port
HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste
WASTE
HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste sensor
WASTE SENSOR
LOW CONC.
High-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 1
LOW CONC.
Normal-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 2
DEIONIZED
Deionized water
WATER
Graphics
All graphics, including screens and printout, are for illustration purposes only and
must not be used for any other purpose.
Foreword 3
Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when using the analyzer. Ignoring any of
these safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
If the system is used in a manner not specified by our company, the
protection provided by the system may be impaired.
Preventing Electric Shock

Please observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.
WARNING
When the Main Power is on, users must not open the rear cover or side
cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the analyzer may cause equipment
failure and even electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the
analyzer. In case of spillage, switch off the power immediately, remove
the spillage and contact our customer service department or your local
distributor.
Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts

Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by
moving parts.
WARNING
When the system is in operation, do not touch such moving parts as
sample probe, reagent probe, mixer and wash probe. Make sure the
reagent disk cover is properly installed.
Do not put your finger or hand into any open part when the system is in
operation.
Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp

Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by
photometer lamp.
WARNING
Light sent by the photometer lamp may hurt your eyes. Do not stare
into the lamp when the system is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the Main
Power and then wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp to cool down
before touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you
may get burned.
4 Foreword
Preventing Laser Radiation
Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by laser
radiation.
CAUTION
Light sent by the bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not stare into
the laser beam from the bar code reader.
Preventing Infection
Please observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous
infection.
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to
biohazardous infection. Do not touch the sample, mixture or waste with
your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow
standard laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Handling Reagents and Wash Solution
WARNING
Reagents and enhanced wash solution may hurt human skins.
Exercise caution when using the reagents and enhanced wash
solution. In case your skin or clothes contact them, wash them off with
soap and clean water. In case the reagents or wash solution spill into
your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an oculist.
Treating Waste Liquids

Please observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and
personal injury caused by waste.
BIOHAZARD
Some substances in reagent, control, enhanced wash solution and
waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose
of them in accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of
the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Foreword 5
Treating Waste Analyzer
Please observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations.
Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for waste disposal.
Preventing Fire or Explosion

Please observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using the
ethanol.
6 Foreword
Precautions on Use
To use the analyzer safely and efficiently, please pay much attention to the following
operation notes.
Intended Use
WARNING
The system is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry
analyzer designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical
chemistries in serum, plasma, urine and CSF samples. Please consult
our company first if you want to use the system for other purposes.
To draw a clinical conclusion, please also refer to the patient’s clinical
symptoms and other test results.
Operator
WARNING
The system is to be operated only by clinical professionals, doctors or
laboratory experimenters trained by our company or our authorized
distributors.
Environment
CAUTION
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation
of the device.
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by
this manual. Installing and operating the system in other environment
may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our customer service department
or your local distributor.
Foreword 7
Preventing Interference by Electromagnetic Noise
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do
not install devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around
the system. Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio
transmitters in the room housing the system. Do not use other CRT
displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may
generate electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong
electromagnetic radiation (e.g. mobile phones or radio transmitters), as
these may interfere with the proper operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation
of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in
a domestic environment may cause radio interference, in which case,
you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.
Operating the System
CAUTION
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
use of the system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment
damage or personal injury.
Before using the system for the first time, run the calibration program
and QC program to make sure the system is in normal status.
Be sure to run the QC program every time you use the system,
otherwise the result may be unreliable.
Do not open the covers of the sample disk and reagent disk when the
system is in operation.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is to be used for connection with
the operation unit only. Do not use it for other connections. Only use the
supplied cable for the connection.
The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software
installed. Installing other software or hardware on this computer may
interfere with the system operation. Do not run other software when the
system is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not
use this computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands
with chemicals.
Do not place the Main Power to ON again within 10 seconds since
placing it to OFF; otherwise the system may enter protection status. If it
does so, switch off the Main Power and switch it on again.
8 Foreword
Maintaining the System
CAUTION
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
maintenance may lead to unreliable results, or even equipment damage
and personal injury.
To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not
too wet) cloth, soaked with mild soap solution if necessary, to clean the
surface. Do not use such organic solvents as ethanol for cleaning. After
cleaning, wipe the surface with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and unplug the power cord before cleaning.
Take necessary measures to prevent water ingression into the system,
otherwise it may lead to equipment damage or personal injury.
Replacement of such major parts as lamp, photometer, sample probe,
reagent probe, mixer and syringe plunger assembly must be followed by
a calibration.
Samples
CAUTION
Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin,
or suspended matter; otherwise the probe may be blocked.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to
unreliable results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test
results, so a sample blank is recommended.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the
compositions of the samples and lead to unreliable results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the
sample open for a long period.
Some samples may not be analyzed on the system based on
parameters the reagents claim capable of testing. Consult the reagent
manufacturer or distributor for details.
Certain samples need to be processed before being analyzed by the
system. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor for details.
The system has specific requirements on the sample volume. Refer to
this manual for details.
Load the sample to correct position on the sample disk before the
analysis begins; otherwise you will not obtain correct results.
Foreword 9
Setting up the System
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and
wavelength, follow the instructions in this manual and the package insert
of the reagents.
Reagents, Calibrators and Controls
CAUTION
Use appropriate reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to performance characteristic of
the system. Consult the reagent suppliers, our company or our
authorized distributor for details, if you are not sure about your reagent
choice.
Store and use reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by
the suppliers. Otherwise, you may not obtain reliable results or best
performance of the system.
Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to
unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity
period.
Perform a calibration after changing reagents. Otherwise, you may not
obtain reliable results.
Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to
unreliable test results. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor
for details.
Backing up Data
NOTE
The system can automatically store data to the built-in hard disk of the
PC. However, data loss is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical
damage of the hard disk. Our company recommends you to regularly
back up the data to portable storage device.
Computer and Printer
NOTE
Refer to the operation manuals of computer and printer for details.
10 Foreword
External Equipment
WARNING
External equipment connected to the system, such as PC and printer,
shall be consistent with IEC 60950, EN 60950, EN55022 (Class B) and
EN55024.
Foreword 11
For Your Notes
12 Foreword
Contents
Foreword ........................................................................................................... 1
Who Should Read This Manual.......................................................................................... 1
What Can You Find in This Manual .................................................................................... 1
Conventions Used in This Manual...................................................................................... 1
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................. 4
Precautions on Use ............................................................................................................ 7
1 System Description .............................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Hardware Introduction .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Analyzing Unit.......................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Operation Unit........................................................................................ 1-19
1.1.3 Output Unit............................................................................................. 1-19
1.2 Software Introduction.......................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.1 Screen Layout........................................................................................ 1-19
1.2.2 Screen Elements ................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.3 Using a Mouse....................................................................................... 1-23
2 Installation............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Unpacking............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Installation Requirements ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Environmental Requirements .................................................................. 2-1
2.2.2 Power Requirements ............................................................................... 2-2
2.2.3 Temperature and Humidity Requirements ............................................... 2-2
2.2.4 Water Supply and Drain Requirements ................................................... 2-3
2.2.5 Space and Accessibility Requirements.................................................... 2-3
2.3 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities ..................................................... 2-4
2.4 Installing/Removing Sample Disk ......................................................................... 2-6
2.5 Installing/Removing Reagent Disk........................................................................ 2-6
2.6 Installing/Removing Sample Tubes ...................................................................... 2-7
2.7 Installing/Removing Reagent Bottles.................................................................... 2-7
2.8 Installing/Removing ISE Components (Optional) ................................................. 2-8
2.8.1 Installing/Removing Reagent Pack.......................................................... 2-8
2.8.2 Installing/Removing Electrodes ............................................................... 2-9
3 Basic Operations .................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 General Operating Procedure .............................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Preparing for Analysis........................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Checking before Powering On................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2 Powering On ............................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.3 Starting the Operating Software............................................................... 3-4
3.2.4 Setting up the Analyzer............................................................................ 3-5
3.2.5 Loading Reagents.................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.6 Checking Reagent Inventory ................................................................... 3-6
3.3 Starting Analysis ................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 Programming Calibrators......................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 Programming Controls............................................................................. 3-7
3.3.3 Programming Routine Samples............................................................... 3-8
3.3.4 Programming STAT Samples .................................................................. 3-9
Contents I
3.3.5 Programming Reagent Blanks............................................................... 3-10
3.3.6 Adding/Deleting Samples and Tests ...................................................... 3-10
3.3.7 Rerunning a Sample .............................................................................. 3-11
3.3.8 Editing Test Results ............................................................................... 3-11
3.3.9 Printing/Sending Test Results................................................................ 3-12
3.4 Finishing Analysis ............................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.1 Powering Off .......................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.2 Checking after Powering Off.................................................................. 3-12
4 Advanced Operations .......................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Start....................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Sample Stop ......................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Stop....................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4 Emergent Samples ............................................................................................... 4-4
4.5 Samples................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.5.1 Sample Request ...................................................................................... 4-6
4.5.2 Current ................................................................................................... 4-16
4.5.3 History.................................................................................................... 4-29
4.6 Reagents ............................................................................................................ 4-29
4.6.1 Reagent Setup....................................................................................... 4-30
4.6.2 Reagent Blank ....................................................................................... 4-36
4.7 Calibration...........................................................................................................4-39
4.7.1 Calibration Request ............................................................................... 4-39
4.7.2 Status ..................................................................................................... 4-40
4.7.3 Results ................................................................................................... 4-43
4.7.4 Calibration Data ..................................................................................... 4-46
4.7.5 ISE ......................................................................................................... 4-47
4.8 QC....................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.8.1 QC Request ........................................................................................... 4-49
4.8.2 Real-time ............................................................................................... 4-50
4.8.3 Daily ....................................................................................................... 4-52
4.8.4 Day to Day ............................................................................................. 4-54
4.9 Status .................................................................................................................. 4-56
4.9.1 Tips ........................................................................................................ 4-56
4.9.2 Sample Disk........................................................................................... 4-58
4.9.3 Reagent Disk ......................................................................................... 4-64
4.9.4 Reaction Disk......................................................................................... 4-66
4.10 Statistics .......................................................................................................... 4-68
4.10.1 Worklist ................................................................................................ 4-68
4.10.2 Results ................................................................................................. 4-69
4.10.3 Workload.............................................................................................. 4-71
4.10.4 Charges ............................................................................................... 4-72
4.11 Parameters...................................................................................................... 4-74
4.11.1 Test....................................................................................................... 4-74
4.11.2 Carryover ............................................................................................. 4-88
4.11.3 Profile ................................................................................................... 4-91
4.11.4 Calculation ........................................................................................... 4-92
4.11.5 Off-system............................................................................................ 4-94
4.11.6 STAT..................................................................................................... 4-96
4.11.7 ISE ....................................................................................................... 4-97
4.12 Setup............................................................................................................... 4-98
4.12.1 System ................................................................................................. 4-99
4.12.2 Dictionary........................................................................................... 4-102
II Contents
4.12.3 Hospital .............................................................................................. 4-104
4.12.4 User ................................................................................................... 4-105
4.12.5 Print.................................................................................................... 4-108
4.12.6 Bar Code............................................................................................ 4-110
4.12.7 LIS...................................................................................................... 4-113
4.12.8 ISE ..................................................................................................... 4-115
4.13 Utilities........................................................................................................... 4-116
4.13.1 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................. 4-116
4.13.2 Working Hours ................................................................................... 4-119
4.13.3 Logs ................................................................................................... 4-120
4.13.4 Alignment........................................................................................... 4-122
4.13.5 ISE ..................................................................................................... 4-123
4.14 Shutdown ...................................................................................................... 4-126
5 Service and Maintenance..................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Preparation ........................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Tools......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Wash Solution.......................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Others ...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Daily Maintenance ................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes....................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe........................................................... 5-3
5.2.3 Checking/Cleaning R1/R2 Probes........................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ........................................... 5-4
5.2.5 Checking Connection of Deionized Water............................................... 5-4
5.2.6 Checking Waste Tubing........................................................................... 5-4
5.2.7 Checking Vacuum/Pressure Pumps ........................................................ 5-5
5.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper .............................................................. 5-5
5.2.9 ISE Unit (optional).................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Weekly Maintenance ............................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe........................................................................... 5-7
5.3.2 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes ........................................................................... 5-8
5.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ......................................................... 5-10
5.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader Windows........................ 5-11
5.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment .................................................... 5-12
5.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment ................................................... 5-13
5.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit......................................................... 5-14
5.3.8 Checking Photometer ............................................................................ 5-14
5.3.9 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes .................................................................. 5-16
5.3.10 Checking Concentrated Wash Solution ............................................... 5-17
5.4 Two-week Maintenance ...................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.1 Maintaining Hydropneumatic Components............................................ 5-18
5.5 Monthly Maintenance.......................................................................................... 5-18
5.5.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe................................................... 5-18
5.5.2 Cleaning Wash Well of R1/R2 Probes................................................... 5-19
5.5.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers................................... 5-20
5.5.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor............................................................... 5-21
5.5.5 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes Rotors ............................................................. 5-22
5.5.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors ............................................. 5-23
5.5.7 Checking Wash Unit .............................................................................. 5-24
5.5.8 Checking Hydropneumatic Drawer........................................................ 5-24
5.5.9 Cleaning Air Filter, Oil Mist Separator, Mist Separator .......................... 5-25
5.6 Three-month Maintenance ................................................................................. 5-25
Contents III
5.6.1 Cleaning Dust Screens .......................................................................... 5-25
5.6.2 Replacing Syringe Plunger Assembly.................................................... 5-26
5.7 Six-month Maintenance ...................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.1 Replacing Lamp..................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2 Replacing or Cleaning Air Screen.......................................................... 5-30
5.7.3 Cleaning Tanks, Floater Switch and Siphon Tube ................................. 5-30
5.7.4 Replacing or Cleaning Air Filter and Silencer ........................................ 5-30
5.7.5 Replacing Waste Tubing........................................................................ 5-30
5.7.6 Replacing DI Water Filter....................................................................... 5-30
5.8 As-Needed Maintenance .................................................................................... 5-30
5.8.1 Unclogging Sample Probe ..................................................................... 5-30
5.8.2 Unclogging R1/R2 Probes ..................................................................... 5-35
5.8.3 Replacing Sample Probe ....................................................................... 5-39
5.8.4 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe................................................... 5-40
5.8.5 Replacing R1/R2 Probes ....................................................................... 5-41
5.8.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers ....................................................... 5-41
5.8.7 Removing Air Bubbles ........................................................................... 5-43
5.8.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette .................................................................. 5-44
5.9 Maintaining ISE Module(Optional)...................................................................... 5-47
5.9.1 Replacing Reagent Pack ....................................................................... 5-47
5.9.2 Replacing Electrodes............................................................................. 5-47
5.9.3 Replacing Tubing ................................................................................... 5-48
5.9.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional) .................................................................... 5-48
5.10 Maintenance Log Sheets ................................................................................ 5-49
6 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Classification of Error Messages .......................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Corrective Measures............................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit........................................................................ 6-5
6.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit ...................................................................... 6-14
7 Data Alarms........................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Data Alarms .......................................................................................................... 7-1
8 Calculation Methods ............................................................................ 8-1
8.1 Reaction Types ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Endpoint................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Fixed-time ................................................................................................ 8-5
8.1.3 Kinetic ...................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2 Prozone Check ................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.1 Antigen Addition..................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.2 Reaction Rate Method ........................................................................... 8-15
8.3 Serum Index ....................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.1 What is Serum Index ............................................................................. 8-17
8.3.2 Calculation of Serum Index ................................................................... 8-18
Appendix A System Specifications.......................................................... A-1
Appendix B Template Modifying Software .............................................. B-1
Appendix C Supplies................................................................................. C-1
Appendix D Index ...................................................................................... D-1
IV Contents
1 System Description
This chapter describes the structure and screen operations of the Chemistry
Analyzer.
The system is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer

designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum,
plasma, urine and CSF(Cerebrospinal fluid) samples.
NOTE
Some samples may not be analyzed on the system based on
parameters the reagents claim capable of testing. Consult the reagent
manufacturer or distributor for details.
1.1 Hardware Introduction

The Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit
(personal computer), output unit (printer), accessories and consumables.
1 System Description 1-1

Figure 1-1 Chemistry Analyzer
The analyzing unit is composed of the measurement system, sample/reagent

system (optional bar code reader), photometric system, wash unit, and ISE
module (optional).
The operation unit is a personal computer, on which the operating software is

installed to control and operate the analyzing unit.
The output unit is a printer used to print out patient reports.
The accessories and consumables include reaction cuvettes, photometer lamp,

etc.
1.1.1 Analyzing Unit

The analyzing unit consists of the following major parts:
Sample disk assembly

Sample dispenser
Sample bar code reader (optional)
Reagent disk assembly
Reagent dispenser
Reagent bar code reader (optional)
Hydropneumatic assembly
Reaction disk assembly
Wash unit
Mixer assembly
Photometer assembly
ISE module (optional)
Water supply module(optional)
Drainage module(optional)
1-2 1 System Description

Figure 1-2 Front View
Sample Mixer Wash Unit Reagent Mixer
R1 Probe
Sample Probe
R2 Probe
Reaction Disk
Sample Disk
Reagent Disk
Front Right Door

Front Left Door
Figure1-3 Rear View
DEIONIZED WATER: Connector for deionized water tubing;

HIGH CONC. WASTE SENSOR: Connector for high-concentration waste
sensor;
HIGH CONC. WASTE: Connector for high-concentration waste tubing;
LOW CONC. WASTE1: Connector for high-pressure low-concentration waste
tubing;
LOW CONC. WASTE2: Connector for normal-pressure low-concentration waste
tubing.

Figure 1-4 Network Interface, Serial Port and Power Jack
Network Interface Serial Port Power Jack
Network interface: Used to connect a network cable;
Serial port: Used for communication between the system and the operation unit.
Power jack: Used for power cable that connects the analyzer to the power
supply.
1.1.1.1 Sample Disk Assembly

The sample disk assembly mainly consists of the sample disk and a cover. It holds
sample tubes and carries each tube to the aspirate position for sampling.
Figure1-5 Sample Disk

Sample Tube
Sample Loading Indicator
Handle
Screw
The sample loading indicator tells you when you should load samples and when you
must not. When the LED flashes, it means that the sample disk will start working and
you are not allowed to load samples; when the LED goes out, you may load desired
samples.
The sample disk includes three circles: inner, middle and outer, each of which
provides 30 tube positions. 90 positions in total are available on the sample disk and
assigned as follows:
Routine samples: 1-60;

Calibrators: S1-S10 (61-70);
Controls: C1-C5 (71-75);
STAT samples: E1-E10 (76-85);
Others: 1) U (No.86) for urine diluent, which is used for ISE unit only;
2) D1 (No.87) for ISE cleaning solution;

3) D2 (No.88) for acid wash solution;
4) D3 (No.89) for alkaline wash solution;
5) W (No.90): for distilled water
Diluted urine can be placed in any routine sample position within 1-60 and you should
define the position during operation.
Virtual sample disk: Up to 6 virtual sample disks are allowed.
The sample disk can hold blood collecting tube, centrifugal tube, plastic tube and
microtube, and also supports bar code scanning by both hand-held and built-in bar
code readers.
The tubes of the following sizes can be held on the sample disk:
Microtube: Φ12×37mm, Φ14×25mm;

Blood collecting tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100
mm, Φ13 X 75 mm, Φ13 X 95 mm, Φ13 X 100 mm;
Plastic tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13
X 75 mm, Φ13 X 95 mm, Φ13 X 100 mm.
NOTE
Do not use sample tubes other than the specified ones.
To remove the sample disk,
Loosen the two retaining screws on the sample disk;
Grab the handle and pull the sample disk upward to remove it from the rotor.
To install the sample disk,
Align the positioning pins on the sample disk to the counterparts on base;
Set the sample disk and tighten the two retaining screws on the disk.
1.1.1.2 Sample Dispenser

The sample dispenser is composed of a sample probe, probe arm, probe rotor (see
Figure1-6), sample syringe (see Figure1-7) and fluidic components.
Figure1-6 Sample Dispenser
Probe Arm
Sample Probe
Probe Rotor

When the front left door of the analyzer is opened, you will see the sample syringe as
shown below.
Figure1-7 Sample Syringe
Sample Syringe
The sample dispenser aspirates certain amount of sample from the designated tube
and then dispenses it into the designated reaction cuvette on the reaction disk.
There is one separate sample probe included on the sample dispenser and has the
following specifications:
Chemical tests: 2µl-45µL in the increment of 0.1µL;

ISE analytes: 70µL for serum and plasma, 140µL for diluted urine.
During analysis, the sample probe first moves to a tube to aspirate certain amount of
sample, then to a reaction cuvette of the reaction disk to dispense the sample, and
finally to the wash well for cleaning.
Washing:
The sample probe is washed on the exterior and interior with acid or alkaline wash
solution. The interior is washed by high-pressure water flow unidirectionally, and the
exterior is rinsed by water surge from up and down.
Safety:
LED indication: An LED is designed to indicate the rotation and sampling of the
sample probe, so that users can load or take out samples (STAT/routine) accordingly.
Features:
Clog detection: When blood clots are detected, the system will give alarm and
proceed to the next sampling step.
Bump detection: The sample probe is capable of detecting bumps in both
horizontal and vertical directions. When bump occurs, the safeguard system is
started automatically to prevent the probe from being damaged.
Liquid-level detection and tracking: The sample probe can automatically detects
the liquid level and lowers into certain height of the sample according to the
aspirate volume.

WARNING
When the system is running, do not put your body part (like hand) or any
obstruction in the rotation path of the sample probe; otherwise personal
damage or equipment damage may be caused.
1.1.1.3 Sample Bar Code Reader (Optional)

Figure 1-8 Sample Bar Code Reader
Sample Bar Code

Scanning Window
Anti-static Brush
CAUTION
Light sent by the sample bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not
stare into the laser beam from the sample bar code reader.
Specifications:
The sample bar code is in conformity with the NCCLS standard and also compatible
with various application environments. The total length of sample bar code is within
3-27 digits.
Table 1-1 Specifications of Sample Bar Code

Item Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF (interleaved 2 of 5), Code128, Code39,
UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code 0.19mm
density
Total length 3-27 digits
Bar code format and User-defined
contents
Max. width of bar 70mm
code label
Min. height of bar 10mm
code label
Max. inclination ±5 degree
angle
Print quality No less than class C (ANSI MH10.8M)

Item Description
Wide and narrow 2.5:1 to 3.0 : 1
ratio
User Settings:
You can set up the sample bar code format and select appropriate symbologies for
each element of the bar code.
Additional Guarantee:
If the built-in sample bar code reader fails to scan the bar code labels, you are
allowed to use a hand-held reader to scan again or type in the bar code directly from
the keyboard.
1.1.1.4 Reagent Disk Assembly

The reagent disk assembly consists of a reagent disk (including a cover) and a
refrigerator.
The reagent disk (see Figure1-9) holds reagent bottles and carries certain bottle to
the aspirate position for aspirating reagent.
The refrigerator keeps reagents in a low-temperature environment to keep them

stable and minimize volatilization.
Figure1-9 Reagent Disk
Handle
Reagent Disk
NOTE
Our company recommends you to use the following wash solution.
Acid: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid; Alkaline: 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution.
You should dilute the sodium hypochlorite solution at appropriate ratio
according to the available chlorine contained in it.
Bottle types: The reagent disk can hold multiple types of reagent bottles, which
include outer-circle 40mL, outer-circle 20mL, inner-circle 40mL, inner-circle
62mL.

Reagent positions: There are 80 bottle positions on the reagent disk. D1 is for
alkaline wash solution, D2 is for acid wash solution and W is for deionized water.
The refrigerator can operate continuously for 24 hours a day to keep the
temperature at 4-10℃.
NOTE
The refrigerator has a power supply independent of that of the analyzing
unit. It will be put into service once the Power is turned on.
The reagent disk rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, carrying the specified

reagent bottle to the aspirate position.
When reagent aspiration is finished on a reagent disk, you can replace the disk
with another one.
Two bottles of any reagent type (R1/R2/R3/R4) of a test can be prepared on the
reagent disk simultaneously.
Each reagent position (R1/R2/R3/R4) can be shared by any reagent type of

different tests on the same reagent disk.
Third reagent (R3) and fourth reagent (R4) can be configured on the system.
Two virtual reagent disks (80 positions) are allowed. You’ll be reminded to
change the reagent disk on which all reagent aspiration is finished.
To remove the reagent disk,
Loosen the two retaining screws on the reagent disk;
Grab the handle and pull the reagent disk upward to remove it from the rotor.
To install the reagent disk,
Align the positioning pins on the reagent disk to the counterparts on base;
Set the reagent disk and tighten the two retaining screws on the disk.
1.1.1.5 Reagent Dispenser

The reagent dispenser is composed of two reagent probes, probe arms, probe rotors
(see Figure1-10), reagent syringes (see Figure1-11) and fluidic components.
Figure1-10 Reagent Dispenser
Probe Arm
R1 Probe
Probe Rotor
Wash Well
R2 Probe

When the left door of the analyzer is opened, you will see the reagent syringes as
shown below.
Figure1-11 Reagent Syringes
Reagent Syringes
The reagent dispenser aspirates certain amount of reagent from the designated
bottle and then dispenses it into the designated reaction cuvette on the reaction disk.
Two separate reagent probes are provided on the analyzer and are respectively used
to aspirate R1/R3 and R2/R4. The reagent aspiration volume is within 20µl-350µl with
increment of 1µl.
The reagent probe first moves to the specified tube to aspirate certain amount of
reagent, then to a reaction cuvette of the reaction disk to dispense the reagent, and
finally to the wash well for cleaning.
Washing:
The reagent probe is washed on the exterior and interior with acid or alkaline wash
solution. The interior is washed by high-pressure water flow unidirectionally, and the
exterior is rinsed by water surge from up and down.
WARNING
When the system is running, do not put your body part (like hand) or any
obstruction in the rotation path of the reagent probe; otherwise personal
damage or equipment damage may be caused.

1.1.1.6 Reagent Bar Code Reader (Optional)
Figure 1-12 Reagent Bar Code Reader
Reagent Bar Code

Scanning Window
Reagent Bottle
CAUTION
Light sent by the reagent bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not
stare into the laser beam from the reagent bar code reader.
Specifications:
The reagent bar code is in conformity with the NCCLS standard and also compatible
with various application environments. The total length of reagent bar code is within
15-30 digits.
Table 1-2 Specifications of Reagent Bar Code

Item Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF (interleaved 2 of 5), Code128, Code39,
UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code 0.19mm
density
Total length 15-30 digits
Bar code format and User-defined
contents
Max. width of bar 55mm
code label
Min. height of bar 10mm
code label
Max. inclination ±5 degree
angle
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Wide and narrow 2.5:1 to 3.0 : 1
ratio

User Settings:
You can set up the reagent bar code format and select appropriate symbologies for
each element of the bar code.
Additional Guarantee:
If the built-in reagent bar code reader fails to scan the bar code labels, you are
allowed to use a hand-held reader to scan again or type in the bar code directly from
the keyboard.
1.1.1.7 Hydropneumatic Assembly

The hydropneumatic assembly consists of the vacuum/pressure gauges (see
Figure1-13), tanks, control valves (see Figure1-14 and Figure1-15), etc.
The hydropneumatic assembly drives the fluidic components and controls the flow
mode of liquid and air via control valves, thus washing the reaction cuvettes, probes
and mixers.
Figure1-13 Front View of Hydropneumatic Assembly (vacuum/pressure gauges)
The gauges are (from left to right): 25psi gauge, 10psi gauge, 5psi gauge and
vacuum gauge, which display the pressure and vacuum values of certain containers.
The container is considered to be normal if the gauge pointer is within the green
scales.
Figure1-14 Left View of Hydropneumatic Assembly
Solenoid Valves
Ball Valve
Tank
Gas Filter
The containers in the above figure (from outside to inside) are: Dilution Tank A,
Dilution Tank B, High-concentration waste tank and Low-concentration waste tank.

Figure1-15 Right View of Hydropneumatic Assembly
Pressure Tank
Water Tank
Mist Separator
Oil Mist Separator
Air Filter
Pressure Regulator
Concentrated Wash Solution Tanks

The concentrated wash solution tanks are(front left to right): Concentrated wash
solution A and Concentrated wash solution B.
The containers on the right of the Hydropneumatic assembly are(front outside to

inside): water tank, pressure tank and vacuum tank.
The pressure regulating valves are(front outside to inside): 10psi valve and 5psi
valve.
WARNING
Pressure or vacuum exists in the containers or concentrated wash
solution tank. Do not open forcedly the containers or tanks when the
system is in operation. Improper operation may cause personal injury or
equipment damage.
1.1.1.8 Reaction Disk Assembly

The reaction disk assembly consists of a reaction disk, cuvettes and heater. See
Figure1-16.
The reaction disk holds the reaction cuvettes, in which sample reacts with reagents
and colorimetric measurement is performed.
The semi-permanent plastic cuvettes are designed for reaction of sample and
reagents, and also colorimetric measurement.
The heater provides a constant-temperature environment for reaction. Cuvettes on

the reaction disk are carried to the reagent dispensing position, sample dispensing
position, mixing position and then washing position successively.

Figure1-16 Reaction Disk
Reaction Disk
The reaction disk rotates clockwise, carrying the specified cuvette to reagent
dispensing position, sample dispensing position, mixing position and then
washing position successively.
The reaction disk is single-circled and can hold 90 semi-permanent plastic

cuvettes, which have inner dimension of 5mm(L)×5mm(W)×30mm(H) and
optical path of 5mm.
Reaction volume: 150µl-360µl.
Auto washing: After each measurement, the cuvette will be washed in 8 phases
and then dried for next measurement.
Reaction temperature: 37℃.
The working positions on the reaction disk are shown in the figure below.
Figure1-17 Working Positions on Reaction Disk
Diluted sample mixing position (65#)

Sample mixing position (64#)
Washing position
(83-90#)
Reaction Disk
R1 dispensing
position (51#)
R2 mixing
position
R2 dispensing
position (44#)
Sample dispensing
position(14#)
Diluted sample dispensing
position(15#)
Photometer(32.5#)

1.1.1.9 Wash Unit
The analyzer provides 8 sets of wash probes, which are located above the reaction
disk.
Figure1-18 Wash Unit
Wash Probe
Wipe Blocks
During measurement, the 90 cuvettes are washed with wash solution A/B and
deionized water in 8 phases, and then dried.
Phase 1: Cuvette is washed with wash solution A;
Phase 2: Cuvette is washed with wash solution B;
Phase 3-6: Cuvette is washed with deionized water;
Phase 7-8: Cuvette is dried and wiped.
If more than half of the 90 cuvettes are dirty, that is, the cuvette blank exceeds
the limit, the system will remind you to start a wash procedure or to replace the
cuvettes if necessary.
The waste wash fluid is discharged in two flows: high-concentration waste and
low-concentration waste.
A liquid level detector is designed to sense the level of high-concentration waste.
1.1.1.10 Mixer Assembly

The mixer assembly consists of two mixers, mixer arm and rotors, as shown in
Figure1-19. It is used to stir the reaction liquid (reagents and sample) in reaction
cuvette to make them react completely.

Figure1-19 Mixer Assembly (taking reagent mixer as example)
Mixer Arm
Mixer
Mixer Rotor
Mixer Wash Well
When stirring is finished, the mixer moves automatically to its wash well for cleaning.
A sample mixer and a reagent mixer are provided to respectively stir samples and
R2/R3/R4.
The sample mixer starts to work once sample is dispensed.
For double-reagent test, the reagent mixer starts to work once R2 is dispensed.
For triple-reagent test, the reagent mixer starts to work after two periods since
R3 is dispensed.
For quadruple-reagent test, the reagent mixer starts to work once R4 is

dispensed.
1.1.1.11 Photometer Assembly

The photometer assembly measures absorbance of reaction liquid in the reaction
cuvette. It is located inside the enclosure of the analyzer.
Specifications:
Light source Tungsten-halogen lamp, 12V/50W

Light transmission component Fiber bundle
Colorimetric component Reaction cuvette
Optical component Holographic concave flat-field gratings
Optical mode Reversed optics
Detector Photodiode array
Measurement wavelength 12 wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm,
505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm,
740nm and 800nm
Measurement range 0-3A
Resolution 0.001Abs

Functioning:
When the cuvette rotates to the axis of corresponding light path, the absorbance at all
the 12 wavelengths is measured.
Cuvette blank correction: Water blank is measured to check the background of

the light source.
Cuvette detection: A weekly cuvette blank is run to check the cuvette status. If
the light transmittance is less than the minimum requirement, the corresponding
cuvette will be considered dirty and should be replaced with a new one.
Aging test: The system can monitor automatically the luminous flux of the light
source. If the flux decreases to a value lower than the specified requirement, the
system will remind you to replace the lamp.
1.1.1.12 ISE Module (Optional)

The ISE (Ion Selective Electrode) module is located in the right side of the analyzer
and consists of the electrodes (K+, Na+, Cl- and Li+), associated tubing, pumps and
valves. The urine diluent is placed on the inner circle of the sample disk. You can
select three or four electrodes as needed.
The ISE module is optional for fully-automated chemistry analyzers and designed to
measure the concentration of K+, Na+, Cl- and Li+ in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
The volume of the serum or plasma sample is 70µl and that of the diluted urine
sample is 140µl. The dilution ratio for urine sample is 1:10 (1 part of urine sample and
9 parts of urine diluent).
Figure1-20 ISE Module (inside the right door, four electrodes)
Li+ Electrode (or spacer electrode)
Na+ Electrode
K+ Electrode
Cl- Electrode
Reference Electrode
Compression Plate
Shielding Box
1.1.1.13 Water Supply Module(Optional)

The water supply module provides water for chemistry analyzers. When the
chemistry analyzer needs water, the inlet valve inside the analyzer is turned on, and
the tubing is prepared, and the booster pump of the water supply module starts
working, supplying water for the analyzer. When the chemistry analyzer does not
need water, the inlet valve inside the analyzer is turned off and the tubing is
unavailable. When the pressure inside the tubing increases and reaches the cutoff
value of the pressure switch of the water supply module, the pressure switch is turned
off, the booster pump is powered off and water supplying is stopped.

Figure 1-21 Water Supply Module
Pressure Switch
Pressure Gauge
Outlet
Air Vent Ball Valve Inlet
While using a water supply module, make sure sufficient deionized water is prepared
in the water tank. Before starting the chemistry analyzer, check if the water supply
module has been powered on.
If the water supply module will not be used for a long time, you are recommended to
switch off its power.
1.1.1.14 Drainage Module(Optional)

The drainage module increases the pressure of waste liquids, which will be
discharged more easily. When the outlet tubing of the analyzer exceeds 5m or the
sewer is higher than 1.2m, a drainage module is required.
Figure 1-22 Drainage Module
Low-concentration Waste 2
Low-concentration Waste 1
Outlet
The drainage module collects and discharges to the waste buffer the
low-concentration waste liquids from the outlet on rear panel of the analyzer. When
the liquid level sensor detects that specified amount of waste liquids have been
collected in the waste buffer, the waste pump of the drainage module starts running,
discharging the waste to the sewer.

1.1.2 Operation Unit
The operation unit, a computer with the Operating Software installed, manages test
requisition, worklist generation, reaction monitoring, result calculation, as well as data
processing (input, storage and query), etc.
1.1.3 Output Unit

The output unit is a printer that prints out the test results and other data.
1.2 Software Introduction

1.2.1 Screen Layout
This section introduces the screen layout of the operating software. Figure1-23
shows the main screen of the software, which is divided into seven functional areas.
Figure1-23 Main Screen
① ③
④
②
⑥ ⑦
① System status area
This area is located on the upper left corner of the screen and displays the
system status, reaction disk temperature, current date and time, ISE status, LIS
communication status and remaining time of analysis.
Status Status Name or Icon Description

ISE status NR ISE module works normally.

NS ISE module is not installed.
ER ISE module is experiencing failures.
LIS status Two arrows are grey. LIS host is not connected.
(Left
arrow
means Left arrow is dark green and System is sending test results to LIS.
receiving; right arrow is light green.
right arrow
means
sending) Left arrow is light green and System is receiving data from LIS.
right arrow is dark green.
Both arrows are light green. System is receiving data from and
sending test results to LIS.
Both arrows are dark green. Idle. LIS communication is normal,

and no sending or receiving is
performed.
② Function buttons area
Function buttons are set on the leftmost column of the screen and include
Samples, Reagents, Calibration, QC, Status, Statistics, Parameters, Setup,
Utilities and Shutdown.
Clicking a function button with the left mouse button will index to the relevant
working page.
③ Shortcut buttons area
Shortcut buttons are located on the upper right corner of the screen and include
(Start/Resume), (Pause), (Stop), (STAT), (Version) and
(Help).
Once the shortcut button is clicked with left mouse button, corresponding
operation will be performed.
④ Working page area
The middle part of the screen is the working page area. This area displays
relevant parameters, procedures, results and graphs.
Below the working page lies the indication area, which displays explanation of the
element pointed by the mouse pointer.
⑤ Indication Area
The indication area is the long blank below the working page area and used to
display the description of the selected element on the screen.
⑥ Operator area
The name of current operator is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

⑦ Alarm message area
The bottom area of the screen is the alarm message area and used to display
alarm and error messages of the system.
By selecting and , you can view the previous or next alarm/error
message. Select D to delete all alarm messages and select A to go to the Logs
page.
1.2.2 Screen Elements
Dialog box
Dialog box is the most ordinary component for man-machine conversation. An
example of a dialog box is shown below.
Dialog Box
Tab
Clicking a tab enables you to access the working page that it indexes. An example of
tabs is shown below.
Tabs
Drop-down list box

A drop-down list box allows you to select an item from the list. An example of a
drop-down list box is shown below.
Drop-down List Box

Buttons
Clicking a button enables you to access the function that it indexes. An example of a
button is shown below.
Button
Radio button
On screens which display a group of radio buttons, only one item can be selected by
placing a checkmark in it. An example of radio buttons is shown below.
Radio Button
Checkbox
On screens which display a group of checkboxes, multiple items can be selected by
placing a checkmark in the box. An example of checkboxes is shown below.
Check Boxes
Edit box
An edit box allows you to enter characters from keyboard. An example of edit boxes
is shown below.
The edit box can accept characters directly input from the keyboard.
Edit Box
Date control
A date control is where you can set up the date and allows you to enter directly or
select from the drop-down list box. An example of date control is shown below.
Date Control

Scroll bar
A scroll bar will appear on some screens when the display contents are too many for
one screen. An example of scroll bars is shown below.
Clicking and holding the scroll bar, you can drag it left/right or up/down to see the
hidden contents.
Vertical Scroll Bar
Horizontal Scroll Bar

List
A list shows the names of tests or profiles. An example of a list is shown below.
You can select or deselect an item by clicking it once or once again.
Slider
A slider is used to select a level continuously. An example of a slider is shown below.
Clicking and holding the slider, you can drag it to desired scale.
Slider
1.2.3 Using a Mouse

Click
Hold the mouse with your hand and move the mouse pointer to the desired object or
area on the screen, then click the left mouse button and release it quickly. A clicking
operation is finished.

For Your Notes

2 Installation
WARNING
The analyzer should be installed only by technicians of our company or
authorized by us.
Before the system is installed, you should prepare a proper site for installation.
If you need to relocate the system, please contact our customer service department
or your local distributor.
2.1 Unpacking
When you receive the system, carefully inspect the package. If you see any signs of
mishandling or damage, file a claim immediately with our customer service
department or your local distributor.
After opening the package, check the delivered goods against the packing list as well
as the appearance of the system. If you find anything missing or damaged,
immediately alert our customer service department or your local distributor.
2.2 Installation Requirements

CAUTION
Make sure the system is installed in a place meeting the requirements.
Otherwise, it will not perform as promised.
2.2.1 Environmental Requirements

The system is for indoor use only.
2 Installation 2-1
The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (gradient less than 1/200).
The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to bear 350Kg weight.
The installation site should be well ventilated.
CAUTION
The system radiates heat while operating. A well-ventilated environment
helps keeping the room temperature stable. Use ventilation equipment if
necessary. Do not expose the system to direct draft that may lead to
unreliable results.
The installation site should be free of dust as much as possible.

The installation site should not be in direct sun.
The installation site should not be close to a heat or draft source.
The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
The installation site should not be disturbed by great noise or power supply.
The system should not be placed near brush-type motors and electrical contacts
that are frequently powered on and off.
Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio transmitters near the system.
Electromagnetic waves generated by those devices may interfere with operation
of the system.
The altitude height of the installation site should be lower than 2000 meters.
2.2.2 Power Requirements

Power supply: AC 220-240V, 50Hz, AC 220/230V, 60Hz; or AC 110/115V, 60Hz
Three-wire power cord, which should be grounded properly.
The system should be connected to a properly-grounded power socket.
The distance between the power socket and the system should be less than 2.5
meters.
Ground voltage must be configured.
WARNING
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding
may lead to electric shock and/or equipment damage.
Connect the system to a power socket that meets the above-mentioned
requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
2.2.3 Temperature and Humidity Requirements

Ambient temperature: 15℃-30℃, with fluctuation less than ±2℃/H.
Relative humidity: 35%RH - 80%RH, without condensation.
2-2 2 Installation
CAUTION
Operating the system in an environment other than the specified may
lead to unreliable test results.
If the temperature or relative humidity does not meet the
above-mentioned requirements, be sure to use air-conditioning
equipment.
2.2.4 Water Supply and Drain Requirements

The water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water.
The water temperature should be within 5℃-32℃.
Flow: Continuous flow should be no less than 30L/H, and the peak flow no
greater than 1L/M. The water unit that has a flow of 20L/H must be equipped
with an accumulator of above 40L.
If water-purifying equipment is used, the pressure at water source should be

within 100kPa-392kPa, and the inlet tubing should be no longer than 10m.
The low-concentration waste tubing should be no longer than 5m and the sewer
must not be 100mm higher than the installation ground. If the waste is
discharged by pressure, the low-concentration waste tubing should be no longer
than 10m and the sewer not 1200mm higher than the installation ground.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of waste liquids according to your local regulations.
CAUTION
The supplied water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water;
otherwise insufficiently-purified water may result in misleading
measurement.
2.2.5 Space and Accessibility Requirements

The system should be installed and used meeting the space and accessibility
requirements as shown below.
2 Installation 2-3
Figure2-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements
Wall
Minimum 500
Maximum 3000
Operation Unit
700
Analyzing Unit
Minimum 500
F
r
Minimum 500
o
n
1180
t
Unit: mm
Minimum 500
2.3 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities

After installing the system, connect it to the water supply and drain facilities correctly.
The system should be installed less than 10m (length of inlet tubing) away
from the water supply.
The system should be installed less than 5m away from the sewer (or waste
bucket), which must not be 100mm higher than the ground.
The two conditions stated above must be met simultaneously; otherwise a

drainage module is required. The analyzer should be installed within 5m from
the drainage module. The sewer must be no 1200mm higher than the ground.
If the installation site you provide does not meet the specified requirements,
contact our customer service department or your local distributor.
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
Do not bend or press the outlet tubing when connecting it to the system.
2-4 2 Installation
Figure2-2 Connecting water supply and drain facilities
Chemistry Analyzer Chemistry Analyzer
Water 2
supply Inlet filter
91 92
with 92
pressure Inlet filter
95 Maximum 95 Maximum
93 of Sewer
Water
supply
94 of
100mm 1200mm
94 96 97 91 93 98
VENT INLET OUTLET LOW CONC LOW CONC

WASTE1 WASTE2
OUTLET
High-concentration Water supply Drainage High-concentration

waste bucket module module waste bucket
Sewer Sewer Sewer Sewer
Standard Configuration Optional Components

Normal- High-
(<8m) (<2m) To water To pressure pressure Low-
Floater signal cable (2m) To sewer supply analyzer low-conc. low-conc. conc.wa
91
Inlet filter 92 (<10m) (<10m) (<10m) waste waste ste
Graphic signs:
95 (<5m) (<5m) (<10m)
High-concentration waste(2m)
PVC knitted tubing(18*12)
96 97 91 PU tubing(6*4)
93 94 98
Electric cable
PU transparent tubing(6*4)
Knitted tubing(optional)
Normal-pressure 1 PU transparent tubing(optional)
93 low-conc.waste(5m) VENT INLET OUTLET LOW CONC LOW CONC
OUTLET
WASTE1 WASTE2
94
High-pressure
Outlet
low-conc.waste(5m) Water supply module Drainage module
1 When the length of tubing 93 or 94 exceeds
5m, a drainage module is required.
Water supply with pressure includes the

2
water unit and water source.
2 Installation 2-5
2.4 Installing/Removing Sample Disk
WARNING
Before installing or removing the sample disk, please ensure the system
is in Standby status and the sample disk has been stopped.
BIOHAZARD
To install the sample disk, align the hole of the disk to the pin of the rotor, gently lower
the disk all the way down and tighten (clockwise) the two retaining screws on the
sample disk to secure it to the rotor.
To remove the sample disk, loosen (counterclockwise) the two retaining screws on
the sample disk to separate it from the rotor, then grab the handle and pull the disk
upward to remove it.
CAUTION
Before running the system, make sure that the sample disk cover is
closed and the protrusion on the cover is placed in the concave on the
system panel. Otherwise the sample probe may be damaged.
NOTE
The sample disk may be contaminated when being used. If samples spill
on the disk, wipe them off with cloth damped with water or disinfector
after placing the Power to OFF.
2.5 Installing/Removing Reagent Disk

WARNING
Before installing or removing the reagent disk, please ensure the system
is in standby status and the reagent disk has been stopped.
BIOHAZARD
To install the reagent disk, align the hole of the disk to the pin of the rotor, gently lower
the disk all the way down and tighten (clockwise) the two retaining screws on the
reagent disk to secure it to the rotor.
To remove the reagent disk, loosen (counterclockwise) the two retaining screws on
the reagent disk to separate it from the rotor, then grab the handles and pull the disk
upward to remove it.
2-6 2 Installation
CAUTION
Make sure the reagent disk cover is closed, otherwise cooling effect of
the refrigerator will be degraded and the reagent probe may be
damaged.
Before running the system, make sure that the reagent disk cover is
closed and the protrusion on the cover is placed in the concave on the
system panel. Otherwise the reagent probe may be damaged.
NOTE
The reagent disk may be contaminated when being used. If reagents
spill on the disk, wipe them off with cloth damped with water or
disinfector after placing the Power to OFF.
2.6 Installing/Removing Sample Tubes

WARNING
Before installing or removing the sample tubes, make sure the sample
disk and sample probe have been stopped and the system is in Standby
status.
Do not use sample tubes other than the specified.
BIOHAZARD
To load a sample tube, insert the tube into the holder until the bottom contacts the
groove of the tube rack.
To remove the sample tube, grab the tube and pull it upward to remove it from the
tube holder.
2.7 Installing/Removing Reagent Bottles

WARNING
Before installing or removing the reagent bottles, make sure the reagent
disk and reagent probes have been stopped and the system is in
Standby status.
Do not use reagent bottles other than the specified.
To load a reagent bottle, insert the bottle into the bottle holder until the bottom
contacts the groove of the holder.
To remove the reagent bottle, grab the bottle and pull it upward to remove it from the
holder.
2 Installation 2-7
2.8 Installing/Removing ISE Components
(Optional)
CAUTION
Use the consumables recommended by our company. Other
consumables may degrade the system performance.
2.8.1 Installing/Removing Reagent Pack
WARNING
Dispose of the used reagent pack in compliance with the local
regulations.
Before performing the installation or removing, make sure the analyzer
is powered off.
BIOHAZARD
To install the reagent pack, first remove the red caps from the reagent pack and then
push the wand just above the top of the reagent pack. Make sure that the three tube
adapters at the bottom of the wand are opposite to those on the top of reagent pack;
then push down the wand to reagent pack. The wand will only fit one way.
Figure2-3 Removing ISE Unit Cover
2-8 2 Installation
Figure2-4 Installing Reagent Pack 1
Connector
Reagent Pack
Figure2-5 Installing Reagent Pack 2
Finally put the reagent pack into the shelf.
To remove the reagent pack, disconnect the wand from the top of the reagent pack by
pushing down the yellow button in the wand, which makes the wand and reagent
pack disconnected. Set the wand on the table surface; then carefully remove the
used reagent pack from the Chemistry Analyzer and dispose of it properly.
To make the reagent pack ready to use, please refer to the steps described in
5.9.1Replacing Reagent Pack.
2.8.2 Installing/Removing Electrodes
BIOHAZARD
2 Installation 2-9
NOTE
The storage for K+ and Li+ electrodes is different from that for other
electrodes. Since there is some certain kind of solution in the lumen of
the electrodes, you can see a tape covering both ends of the lumen.
Whenever unpacking these electrodes, you should first remove the
tape. If some of the solution leaks outside of the electrode, wipe it
before installing.
Each electrode including the reference electrode has an O-ring on one
side of its lumen. So please ensure the side with the O-ring towards up
when installing the electrode. If the O-ring is missing, apply a new one.
Extra two O-rings are supplied in the electrode package.
Connetion Pins
O-Ring
For the reference electrode, if necessary, soak it in warm water until the
lumen has been cleared free of salt build-up.
Before performing the installation or removing, make sure the analyzer
is powered off.
To install the electrodes, follow the steps below:
1 Open the ISE unit door on right side of the analyzing unit.
2-10 2 Installation
2 Unscrew the captive screw of the ISE module shielding box and make the
shielding box cover towards outside. Unscrew the cover and you will see
the electrodes housing.
Electrode housing
3 First install the reference electrode.

Take the reference electrode from its protective packaging and remove the
insert from the lumen.
Make sure that the red sphere in the reference electrode floats on the top
of the internal solution in the reservoir.
Red Sphere
Insert
Place the reference electrode inside the housing by pressing down the
compression plate and then push it straight against the back of the
housing. Release the compression plate and ensure the electrode will not
be easily moved.
2 Installation 2-11
Insert the reference electrode
Press the compression plate
4 Take the Cl-(Chloride) electrode from its protective packaging and place it
in the ISE module housing in the same way as the reference electrode.
5 Repeat the process for the K+(Potassium) electrode.
6 Repeat the process for the Na+(Sodium) electrode.
7 Repeat the process for the Li+ electrode or the spacer.
8 Push all the electrodes simultaneously to ensure they are aligned correctly.
Sample Entry Port
Spacer
Na+ Electrode
K+ Electrode
Cl- Electrode
Reference Electrode
Compression Plate
The spacer, Na+, K+ and Cl- electrodes are of the same size and shape.
Connection pins at the rear of each electrode are different and ensure that
the electrodes are inserted in the correct order. If one of the electrodes can
not be easily pushed into the housing, check the electrode first and then
try again.
9 Install the cover back to the shielding box by tightening the screw.
10 Fasten the two screws at the bottom of the shielding box.
11 Close the ISE unit door.
NOTE
If a Li+ electrode is configured, install or remove it in the same way as
the spacer electrode.
To remove the electrodes, follow the steps below:
1 Place the POWER to OFF.

2 Open the ISE unit door.
3 Unscrew the screw of the ISE module shielding box and make the cover
towards outside. Unscrew the cover, which the electrodes housing will be
seen.
2-12 2 Installation
4 Take the electrode(s) out from the housing by pressing down the
compression plate(s) in the opposite sequence of installing.
2 Installation 2-13
For Your Notes
2-14 2 Installation
3 Basic Operations
This chapter provides step-by-step procedures to operate the analyzer for basic
tasks.
3.1 General Operating Procedure

Preparing for Analysis
3.2.1 Checking before Powering On
3.2.2 Powering On
3.2.3 Starting the Operating Software
3.2.4 Setting up the Analyzer
3.2.5 Loading Reagents
3.2.6 Checking Reagent Inventory
Starting Analysis
3.3.1 Programming Calibrators
3.3.2 Programming Controls
3.3.3 Programming Routine Samples
3.3.4 Programming STAT Samples
3.3.5 Programming Reagent Blanks
3.3.6 Adding/Deleting Samples and Tests
3.3.7 Rerunning a Sample
3.3.8 Editing Test Results
3.3.9 Printing/Sending Test Results
Finishing Analysis
3.4.1 Powering Off
3.4.2 Checking after Powering Off
3 Basic Operations 3-1

Preparing for Analysis
Before starting analysis, necessary works should be done to prepare test conditions
for the system.
Starting Analysis
Samples are analyzed in correct test procedures, and the test results can be inquired,
edited, output, etc.
Finishing Analysis
When all analysis are finished, necessary operations should be performed.
3.2 Preparing for Analysis

3.2.1 Checking before Powering On
You should do the following operations before powering on the analyzer.
WARNING
Reagents, concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution are
corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution when using the reagents,
concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution. In case your
skin or clothes contact the reagents or wash solution, wash them off
with soap and clean water. In case the reagents or wash solution spill
into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an oculist.
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles when performing
the following operations.
1 Check the power supply and make sure it can supply proper voltage for the
analyzer.
2 Check the connections among the analyzing unit, operation unit and printer.
Make sure the connections are right and secure. Check the power cords of the
analyzing unit, operation unit and printer, and make sure they are well
connected to the power sockets.
3 Check and make sure sufficient paper is prepared for the printer.
4 Check if concentrated wash solution A and B are sufficient. Refer to 5.3.10
Checking Concentrated Wash Solution for details. If not, please refill.
CAUTION
Mindray has specified the following concentrated wash solutions:
Wash solution A: CONTRAD 70
Wash solution B: CONTRAD 70
Be sure to use the concentrated wash solution specified by
Mindray. Otherwise, proper result may not be obtained.
3-2 3 Basic Operations

5 Check the reagent disk and ensure alkaline and acid wash solutions are placed
respectively on position D1 and D2, and distilled water on position W. If not,
please refill.
WARNING
Poisonous gas will be produced if acid wash solution is mixed with
alkaline wash solution. Do not mix the acid wash solution with the
alkaline one.
CAUTION
Our company has specified the following enhanced wash
solutions:
Acid wash solution: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid;
Alkaline wash solution: Alkaline: 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution.
You should dilute the sodium hypochlorite solution at appropriate
ratio according to the available chlorine contained in it.
Be sure to use the enhanced wash solution specified by us.
Otherwise, proper result may not be obtained.
We recommend the acid and alkaline wash solutions be used
alternately. For instance, if the acid wash solution is used at
current startup, the alkaline one should be used at next startup.
6 Check the sample disk and ensure the following solutions are placed correctly.
Position U: Urine diluent, for ISE analytes only;
Position D1: ISE cleaning solution;
Position D2: Acid wash solution;
Position D3: Alkaline wash solution;
Position W: Distilled water
NOTE
If your analyzer is not equipped with the ISE module, you don’t
have to check positions U and D1.
7 If your analyzer is equipped with the ISE module, please make sure the
reagent pack is installed with sufficient reagent.
8 Check the connection of deionized water tank and turn on the inlet valve. Refer
to 5.2.5 Checking Connection of Deionized Water for details.
9 Check the drainage of low-concentration waste. Make sure the tubing is not
bent and the waste level is not higher than the waste outlet of the analyzer.
Refer to 5.2.6 Checking Waste Tubing for details.
10 Check the connection of high-concentration waste bucket and make sure it is
emptied.
11 Check if leakage or air bubbles exist on the sample syringe and reagent
syringe. Refer to 5.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringe for details.

12 Check the sample probe and make sure the probe is not contaminated or bent.
If the probe is contaminated, clean it as instructed by 5.3.1 Cleaning Sample
Probe. If the probe is bent, replace it according to 5.8.3 Replacing Sample
Probe.
13 Check the reagent probe and make sure the probe is not contaminated or bent.
If the probe is contaminated, clean it as instructed by 5.3.2 Cleaning R1/R2
Probe. If the probe is bent, replace it according to 5.8.4Cleaning Wash Well
of Sample Probe.
14 Check the sample mixer and reagent mixer and make sure the mixers are not
contaminated or bent. If the mixer is contaminated, clean it as instructed by
5.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixer. If the mixer is bent, replace it
according to 5.8.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixer.
3.2.2 Powering On
Connect the power cord of the system to the socket and then switch on the powers in
the sequence presented below:
1 Turn on the water unit.

2 Place the Main Power to the ON position.
3 Place the Power to the ON position.
Power
Main Power
Main Power: means ON and means OFF.
Power: means ON and means OFF.

4 Turn on the monitor of the computer.
5 Turn on the computer.
6 Turn on the printer.
3.2.3 Starting the Operating Software

1 Start the Windows operating system. The operating software will be started
automatically.

2 The Login dialog box of the operating software is displayed.
Enter the username and password, and then select OK. If you want to log on the
system quickly, please select the check box next to Quick Mode.
NOTE
You are forbidden to perform measurements once logging on the
software in quick mode.
The username of the system administrator is “ADMIN”, and the
initial password is “ ”. Please note that the password is
case sensitive. You are recommended to change the password
when logging in for the first time, to prevent others from abusing
the authorities of ADMIN. Refer to 4.12.4 User for details.
3 The main screen of the operating software is displayed with the Startup status
dialog box popping up. After initialization, the Startup status dialog box is closed
and the system enters Idle status. Then you may start the analysis.
NOTE
If the operating environment does not meet the requirements
during startup check, the system will remind you of the error and
ask you to exit the software and shut down the computer.
Once any problem occurs during initialization, the system will stop
the process and forbid sample analysis unless a successful
initialization is performed by executing Startup Initialization on
the Daily Maint. page.
CAUTION
You may not start the analysis until the system status area of the screen
displays “Idle” and the analyzer has been turned on for about 30
minutes, so that the light source and temperature gets steady.
3.2.4 Setting up the Analyzer

The analyzer will not function properly unless it is properly configured.
If this is the first time the analyzer being used you must complete all the following
settings. Also you must set up sample/reagent bar code formats if a sample or
reagent bar code reader is configured.
Before requesting tests, perform the following steps to finish the settings:
Test parameters: Select ParametersÆTestÆBasics in succession, and enter

test parameters following the reagent package insert. Select
ParametersÆTestÆReference in succession, and set up the reference ranges.
Refer to 4.11.1.1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Test and 4.11.1.2 Setting
up Reference Range for Test for details.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the reagents specified by our company and set up test
parameters following the package insert. Otherwise, proper result may
not be obtained.
Reagent setup: Select ReagentsÆReagent Setup, and set up the reagent

information. Refer to 4.6.1 Reagent Setup for details.
Carryover: Select ParametersÆCarryover, and set up reagent carryover. Refer

to 4.11.2 Carryover for details.
CAUTION
Set up carryover relationship according to reagent components provided
by the reagent manufacturer. Otherwise test results may be influenced.
Calibration: Select ParametersÆTest ÆCalibration, and set up calibrators and

calibration rule. Refer to 4.11.1.3 Calibration for details.
QC: Select ParametersÆTest ÆQC, and set up controls and QC rule. Refer to
4.11.1.4 QC for details.
Hospital: Select SetupÆHospital, and set up the hospital information. Refer to
4.12.3 Hospital for details.
Print: Select SetupÆPrint, and set up printer and print templates. Refer to
4.12.5 Print for details.
LIS: Select SetupÆLIS, and set up LIS host and communication mode. Refer to
4.12.7 LIS for details.
Bar code: Select SetupÆBar Code, and set up sample and reagent bar code
rules. Refer to 4.12.6 Bar Code for details.
3.2.5 Loading Reagents

Load reagents to their assigned positions on the reagent disk, and then remove the
bottle caps. Please select correct bottle type as configured so that the reagent
inventory can be checked accurately.
WARNING
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
Some reagents may hurt human skin. Exercise caution when handling
the reagents. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
3.2.6 Checking Reagent Inventory

When reagent pack is installed, you should check the reagent inventory as directed
by 4.6.1.4 Checking Reagent Inventory.

3.3 Starting Analysis
BIOHAZARD
Calibrators, controls and samples are biohazardous. Do not touch
them with your hands directly. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if
necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow
standard laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
When you finish all the preparations stated in previous sections and the system is in
Idle state, you may proceed to the programming operation and then start the
analysis.
3.3.1 Programming Calibrators

When using the system for the first time, you must run calibrations following these
steps:
CAUTION
You need to run the calibration again when the measurement conditions
are changed, such as reagent lot, test parameters, light source, etc.
Select CalibrationÆCalib. Request, and request calibration run for desired

tests. Refer to 4.7.1 Calibration Request for details.
After requisition is finished, place the calibrators in assigned positions on the
sample disk.
Select the button to start running the calibrators. Refer to 4.1 Start for
details.
To view calibration status, you can:
Select CalibrationÆStatus and view calibration status of desired test. Refer to 4.7.2
Status for details. Or
Select CalibrationÆCalib. Request and view calibration status of desired test in the
Calibrations field. Or
Select StatusÆSample Disk. Select desired calibrator position on the disk graph,
then select a test from the Test Result list.
To view calibration results:
Select CalibrationÆResults and select a test from the Tests list. Refer to 4.7.3
Results for details.
3.3.2 Programming Controls

You are recommended to run two quality controls for each test everyday and check if
the system is running normally and steadily.

CAUTION
If the Interval on the ParametersÆTestÆQC window is set to a number
other than 0, the system will automatically run quality controls among the
specified number of samples.
Follow this procedure to perform quality controls:
Select QCÆQC Request, and request quality controls for desired tests. Refer to
4.8.1 QC Request for details.
After requisition is finished, place the control samples in assigned positions on
the sample disk.
Select the button to start running the controls. Refer to 4.1 Start for details.
To view QC status, you can:
Select QC Æ QC Request and view quality control status of desired test in the
QCs field. Or
Select StatusÆSample Disk. Select desired control position on the disk graph,
then select a test from the Test Result list.
To view QC results, select QCÆReal-time (Daily/Day to Day). Refer to 4.8.2

Real-time, 4.8.3 Daily and 4.8.4 Day to Day for details.
3.3.3 Programming Routine Samples

Follow this procedure to analyze routine samples:
Request and run samples
1) Request samples manually (in any conditions):
Select SamplesÆSample Request, and request samples with desired tests.

Refer to 4.5.1 Sample Request for details;
After requisition is finished, place the samples in assigned positions on the

sample disk;
Select the button to start running the samples. Refer to 4.1 Start for
details.
2) Obtaining samples in batch (only when the system is connected to LIS):
NOTE
If the system is equipped with a sample bar code reader, click Scan on
the Sample Request page to scan all positions on current sample disk;
otherwise, set up positions manually for the samples downloaded from
LIS.
Load the samples on the sample disk;
Select SamplesÆSample Request, and select the Download button to

download samples from the LIS host that are identified successfully by the bar
code reader;

details.
3) Obtaining samples automatically (only when the system is equipped with

sample bar code reader and connected to LIS):
Load samples on the sample disk;
Select the button. The system scans all samples on current sample disk
and then downloads sample information from the LIS host. Then the identified
samples are run automatically.
To view status of sample analysis, you can:
Select Samples Æ Sample Request and view test status of desired sample in
the Samples field. Or
Select StatusÆSample Disk. Select desired sample on the disk graph, then
select a test from the Test Result list. Refer to 4.9.2 Sample Disk for details.
To view test results, select SamplesÆCurrent (or History). Refer to 4.5.2

Current and 4.5.3 History for details.
3.3.4 Programming STAT Samples

STAT samples are analyzed with priority to meet urgent demand of patients.
Follow this procedure to analyze STAT samples:
To request and run STAT samples, you can use two methods:
1. Emergent samples
NOTE
Emergent sample function is designed for the operators who are not
familiar with the analyzer and have emergent samples to analyze. You
are not recommended to use the emergent sample function in normal
situation.
Before analyzing emergent samples, you must first set up parameters
of STAT on the ParametersÆSTAT page. See 4.11.6 STAT.
When requesting samples using the button, you should only

order the tests that are selected on the ParametersÆSTAT page.
Select the button in the shortcut buttons area of the main screen and
request STAT samples on the popup dialog box. Refer to 4.4 Emergent
Samples for details;
After entering the measurement information in Request Emergent Samples

dialog box, load the samples in assigned positions, and then select OK to start
analyzing the samples.

2. STAT samples
Select SamplesÆSample Request, then request samples with desired tests

and tick the check box to the left of STAT. Refer to 4.5.1 Sample Request for
details.

sample disk;
details.
To view status of sample analysis, you can:
Select Samples Æ Sample Request and view test status of desired sample in
the Samples field. Or
Select StatusÆSample Disk. Select desired sample on the disk graph, then
select a test from the Test Result list. Refer to 4.9.2 Sample Disk for details.
To view test results, select SamplesÆCurrent (or History). Refer to 4.5.2

Current and 4.5.3 History for details.
3.3.5 Programming Reagent Blanks
CAUTION
Running reagent blank checks whether the reagent is invalidated or not.
Select ReagentsÆReagent Blank and request reagent blanks. Refer to 4.6.2

Reagent Blank for details.
Select the button to start running the reagent blanks. Refer to 4.1 Start for
details.
To view test result of reagent blank, select date range on the Reagent Blank
page and search for desired reagent blanks.
3.3.6 Adding/Deleting Samples and Tests

During measurement you can add or delete tests for requested samples or add new
samples if needed.
Adding new samples
1) Adding samples manually
Select SamplesÆSample Request and request samples with desired tests.

Refer to 4.5.1 Sample Request for details.

sample disk.
details.

2) Obtaining samples automatically
Load the samples on the sample disk;
Select SamplesÆSample Request, and select the Download button to

download samples from the LIS host that are identified successfully by the bar
code reader.
Select SamplesÆSample Request, and select the Scan button to scan bar
code labels of the added samples.
details.
Adding/Deleting tests
Select SamplesÆSample Request, and then select a sample and desired tests that
you would like to add or delete.
3.3.7 Rerunning a Sample

When analysis is finished, you may rerun desired sample in two modes: Manual and
Auto.
NOTE
You must first set up auto rerun before rerunning samples. For
instructions of setting auto rerun, refer to 4.12.1 System.
To rerun a sample manually, you can:
Select SamplesÆCurrent, then select desired sample and click the Rerun button.
Or
Select StatusÆSample Disk, then select desired sample on the disk graph and click
the Rerun button.
To rerun a sample automatically, you can:
Set up the rerun conditions on the System page of the Setup screen. The system will
rerun the samples according to the conditions you have configured.
3.3.8 Editing Test Results

When analysis is finished, you can edit the test results if needed.
CAUTION
Test results can only be edited by authorized personnel.
To edit one or multiple sample results, you can:
Select SamplesÆCurrent (or History), then select the Edit button and edit desired
test result on the popup dialog box. Refer to 4.5.2 Current and 4.5.3 History for
details.

3.3.9 Printing/Sending Test Results
Select SamplesÆCurrent (or History), then select desired test results and click the
Print/Send button. Refer to Printing/Transferring Test Results in section 4.5.2.1
Viewing Current Results by Sample for details.
NOTE
Be sure to perform print setup on the Print page before printing test
results. Refer to 4.12.5 Print for details.
Before transferring test results to the LIS host, make sure LIS
communication has been configured. Refer to 4.12.7 LIS for details.
3.4 Finishing Analysis

3.4.1 Powering Off
When all analysis is finished and the system is in standby status, select Shutdown
from the main screen to exit the operating software. Refer to 4.14 Shutdown for
details.
After exiting the Windows operating system, following this procedure to turn off the
powers:
1 Turn off the printer;

2 Turn off the monitor of the computer;
3 Place the Power of the analyzing unit to OFF.
4 Turn off the water unit.
NOTE
The refrigerator still functions after the Power is placed to OFF. To shut
down the refrigerator, place the Main Power to OFF.
3.4.2 Checking after Powering Off
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles when performing
the following operations.
1 Cap every reagent bottle on the reagent disk.
NOTE
If the Main Power is placed to OFF, take reagents out from the
reagent disk and put them into an external refrigerator.

2 Remove the calibrators, controls and samples from the sample disk.
3 Check the surface of the analyzing unit for stains, and if any, wipe them off with
clean soft cloth.
4 Check the high-concentration waste bucket and empty it if necessary.

For Your Notes

4 Advanced Operations
This chapter provides step by step operations of the operating software by shortcut
buttons and function buttons.
4.1 Start
NOTE
The button is not available in following conditions:

When an error of Level 12 (errors to forbid test) occurs; or
When the system is idle, no test is requested or no sample is
available; or
When the system is testing, there is no sample that has been
requested and configured on current sample disk.
1. After requesting samples, calibrators and controls, select the button from
the shortcut buttons area of the main screen. The Start Testing dialog box is
displayed.
4 Advanced Operations 4-1

Figure4-1 Start Testing Dialog Box
2. Select the following information on the Start Testing dialog box.
Field Description
S. Disk Select a sample disk from the drop-down list box. The number of
pending samples on the sample disk is displayed in the Samples
field.
R. Disk Select a reagent disk from the drop-down list box. The number of
available tests on the reagent disk is displayed in the Tests field.
S. Range There are two options available: ALL and Partial.
Select All to run all samples on the selected sample disk;
When selecting Partial, you should set the sample positions in the
Position field below.
Position When selecting Partial in the S. Range field, enter desired sample
positions in the edit box to the right of Position. You can only enter
numbers, ‘ - ‘ and ‘ , ‘ in the edit box.
e.g. Enter a sample range: 1-23;
Enter single samples: 1, 3, 5
Enter sample range and single positions: 1-4,6,10,14-16,19
The samples that do not exist or do not meet the analyzing conditions
will be ignored during analysis.
3. Select OK. The samples you select are analyzed.
CAUTION
Before selecting OK, please ensure that samples, calibrators, controls and
reagents are placed in assigned positions.
4-2 4 Advanced Operations

4.2 Sample Stop
Sample stop function enables the user to load or unload samples during
measurement by pausing the sampling.
If you need to add multiple samples or replace the sample disk during measurement,
you should first pause the sampling and then start loading samples or replacing
sample disk.
When routine samples are requested but not placed on the sample disk, you should
pause the sampling by selecting in the shortcut buttons area of the main screen
and load the samples to assigned positions, then select to resume the
measurement.
NOTE
The button is available only when the system is testing normally.

If the sampling for all pending and in-progress samples on current
sample disk is not finished, you’re not allowed to change the
sample disk but can refill more samples or add new
emergent/routine samples.
If the sampling for all pending and in-progress samples on current
sample disk is finished, you can select the button and replace
the sample disk or reagent disk. Please note that any tests on the
replaced sample disk cannot be rerun automatically or manually.
1. During measurement, select the button from the shortcut buttons area of
the main screen. The following dialog box pops up.
Figure4-2 Confirm Dialog Box for Sample Stop
2. Select OK. The sampling is stopped and dispensing of R1 for the next sample is
paused, but the system still continues the photometric measurement.
4.3 Stop
CAUTION
We recommend this stop function not be used unless it is necessary
(e.g. the analyzer is experiencing failures).
Once the stop button is selected, all unfinished tests will be invalidated.

NOTE
The button is available only when the system is in Testing, Pause

and Sample Stop status.
The stop function is used when you want to terminate the measurement and
invalidate all unfinished tests.
1. Select from the shortcut buttons area of the main screen. The following
dialog box pops up.
Figure4-3 Confirm Dialog Box for Stop
2. Select OK. The measurement is stopped and all unfinished tests are invalidated.
4.4 Emergent Samples

The system provides the emergent sample function that enables the personnel who
are not familiar with operating the analyzer to request and analyze emergent samples
quickly.
1. Select the button from the shortcut buttons area of the main screen. The
Request Emergent Samples dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-4 Request Emergent Samples Dialog Box

2. Set the following information.
Field Description
S. Disk Select a sample disk from the drop-down list box. If the current
sample disk has positions available, the S. Disk field is read-only;
otherwise, the next sample disk is displayed and the S. Disk field is
selectable.
Sample ID Enter the sample ID. It ranges from 9001 to 9999 and increases by 1
once an emergent sample is requested.
Position Select a position where the sample is to be placed.
The default is the first available STAT position and you can change it
as needed.
NOTE
You are recommended to place emergent samples on
the 10 STAT positions (E1-E10) of the sample disk.
Ordinary STAT samples that are requested on the
Sample Request page can be placed on any position
of the sample disk.
Charact. Select the characteristic of the sample. It includes Icterus,

Hemolysis and Lipemia. You can configure more characteristics on
the Dictionary page. See 4.12.2 Dictionary for details.
Tube Type Select the sample tube type from the drop-down list box. If you mark
the Tube Type check box in the Read-only Parameters area of the
STAT page, this field will be read-only.
Volume Select the sample volume from the drop-down list box. If you mark
the Volume check box in the Read-only Parameters area of the
Samp. Select the sample type from the drop-down list box. If you mark the
Type Sample Type check box in the Read-only Parameters area of the
Bar Code Enter the bar code information of the sample.
3. To run a sample blank before analyzing the sample, mark the check box to the
left of Samp. Blank.
4. Select OK. While the system is in testing status, if the sample disk you have
selected is the current one, the system will start analyzing the sample
immediately once you select OK; otherwise you will be prompted to replace the
current sample disk after the sampling is finished, then you can start analyzing
the emergent sample on the popup Start Testing dialog box. If the system is idle,
it will start analyzing the sample automatically after you select OK.

NOTE
The button is available only when the system is in Idle,

Sample Stop, Pause and Testing status.
If no test or profile is selected on the STAT page of the Parameters
screen, the button cannot be used.
When emergent samples are analyzed, the test results will be printed
automatically no matter whether auto print is configured on the Print
page of the Setup screen.
4.5 Samples
Select Samples from the function buttons area of the main screen. The Samples
screen is displayed with Sample Request page as the default view.
On this screen you can request sample runs and view current and history test results
by sample or by test.
4.5.1 Sample Request

Figure4-5 Samples Screen, Sample Request Page

NOTE
In the Tests and Profiles field, the tests or profiles are indicated by
different colors, which are described below.
Dark blue: The test is selected.
Grey: The test is forbidden to request.
Silver: The test is normal and can be requested.
The tests that are not configured correctly will appear in grey. When you
move the mouse pointer on the tests or profiles, a popup message is
displayed showing the reason why the tests or profiles can not be
requested.
Reagent position is not assigned Set the position of the reagent.
Not enough reagent Refill more reagent
Reagent expired Reset or scan the reagent.
Sample volume not configured Set the sample volume.
Combination of above reasons Take corresponding measures
stated above.
The following table explains the fields on the Sample Request page.
Field Description
ID Sequence number of samples (1-9000).
Enter the start sample ID in the first edit box and end sample ID in
the second one.
Identical ID in two edit boxes means one sample is entered. If the
end ID is greater than the start ID, it indicates all samples within
the range are requested with same sample information (except
sample ID) and tests.
Position Select a position where the sample is to be placed.
All positions on the sample disk include:
Routine: 1-60;
Calibrator: S1-S10 (61-70);
Control: C1-C5 (71-75);
STAT sample: E1-E10 (76-85);
Others: U (urine diluent, 86), for ISE unit only
D1 (ISE cleaning solution, 87)
D2 (acid wash solution, 88)
D3 (alkaline wash solution, 89)
W (distilled water, 90)

Field Description
NOTE
Selecting a position from the drop-down list box means:
Assigning a position to the sample that you want to
request; or
Assigning a position to the first sample of the batch
that you want to request. The positions of remaining
samples will be given by the system automatically
successively.
If the analyzer is equipped with a sample bar code
reader, the Position field is 0 by default. You can
change it manually, but the finally-scanned one will
prevail.
Once a position is assigned manually or by scanning, it
will no longer be included in the Position drop-down list
box.
Type Select a sample type from the drop-down list box. You can define
more options on the Dictionary page of the Setup screen.
Tube Type Select a sample tube type from the drop-down list box. It includes
two options: Standard and Micro.
Volume Select desired volume type you want to run the sample. It includes
the following options:
Standard:
Diluted
Increased
Inc.&Dil. (increased and diluted)
Decreased
Dec.&Dil. (decreased and diluted)
For detailed information about the sample volume types, refer to
4.11.1.1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Test.
Charact. Select a characteristic of the sample. It includes three default
types: Icterus, Hemolysis and Lipemia. You can define more
options on the Dictionary page of the Setup screen.
Replicate Set the times that you want to run the tests requested for the
sample.
The default is 1, which means no repeat.
The bar code can be scanned by the built-in sample bar code
reader or a hand-held bar code reader, or entered manually.
STAT When this option selected, the sample(s) currently requested will
be run in high priority.
It is not selected by default.
Sample Blank To run a sample blank before analyzing the samples, select the
check box to the left of Sample Blank.

In the Samples field, the samples are indicated by different status which has the
following meaning:
Status Description
Req It stands for requested and means tests are ordered for
the sample but not added to the test list.
NReq It stands for not requested and means the sample is
identified by bar code reader but has no program
information associated with the sample ID.
Pen It stands for pending and means the sample is added to
the test list but not started for analysis.
InP It stands for in progress and means the sample is being
analyzed.
Fin It stands for finished and means the sample is analyzed
and results are calculated.
Abn It stands for abnormal and means the sample is
analyzed, but some tests are not calculated or
experience errors, such as antigen excess, linearity
range exceeded, etc.
The following table introduces the buttons on the Sample Request page.
Button Function
Details After selecting a sample from the Samples list, click the Details
button. The Details dialog box is displayed and allows you to
view and edit the sample information and corresponding patient
demographics.
Refer to 4.5.1.1 Configuring Sample Information for details.
Download This button is available only when:
The system is in Idle status; and
The system is connected to the LIS host; and
The system is enabled to download sample information from
the LIS host.
By selecting this button, you can download samples from the LIS
host.
Refer to 4.5.1.2 Downloading Sample Information for details.
Scan When the system is in Idle status, select Scan to scan specified
samples on the sample disk.
Refer to 4.5.1.3 Scanning Sample Bar Code for details.
Delete Click this button to delete specified sample that has been
requested.
The Delete button does not apply to the samples in NReq or Fin
status.
Refer to 4.5.1.4 Deleting a Sample for details.
Move Click this button to move the selected sample to a position on
current or other sample disk.
Refer to 4.5.1.5 Changing Sample Position for details.

Button Function
Request After setting new samples or changing requested sample
information, select Request to finish your requesting or save the
changes.
Refer to 4.5.1.6 Requesting Samples for details.
Cancel After setting new samples or changing requested sample
information, select Cancel to cancel your requesting or changes.
Default Selecting the Default button, you can set the sample and test
information you’ve configured as defaults.
If the Request Sample with Defaults on the System page of
Setup screen is enabled, the default settings will be applied
automatically in following sample requesting.
NOTE
When you order new tests for a requested sample, the original tests of
the sample that have been requested and are not requested this time
will be invalidated, no matter they have been run or not.
4.5.1.1 Configuring Sample Information

Perform the following steps to configure the sample information:
1. Select a sample from the Samples list of the Sample Request page.
2. Select Details. The Details dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-6 Details Dialog Box

3. Enter the following information:
Field Description
Bar Code Enter the sample bar code with maximum of 20 characters.
Sample Type Select a sample type from the drop-down list box. You can
define more options on the Dictionary page of the Setup
screen.
Charact. Select a characteristic of the sample. It includes three default
types: Icterus, Hemolysis and Lipemia. You can define more
Tested By Select the tester who analyzes the sample.
Sent From Select the department from which the sample is submitted.
Sent By Select the doctor who submits the sample for analysis.
Blood Bag Enter the sequence number of the blood bag.
Send D/T Select the date and time when the sample is received and
acknowledged by the clinical laboratory. The default is the
current date and time.
Demographics To configure the patient information, select the check box to the
left of Demographics. All patient information options are
displayed in the lower part of the Details dialog box.
Patient Enter the name of the patient.
Gender Select the patient gender.
Nationality Enter the nationality of the patient.
Age Enter the patient age in the edit box and then select an age unit
from the drop-down list box.
Birth Date Select the date when the patient was born.
Birth Time Select the time at which the patient was born.
Blood Type Select the blood type of the patient.
Type Select the patient type from the drop-down list box. It includes
Inpatient and Outpatient by default. You can define more
Pay Type Select the payment type of the patient. It includes Self-pay and
Social Security by default. You can define more options on the
Dictionary page of the Setup screen.
SS No. Enter the social security number of the patient, when Social
Security is selected in the Pay Type field.
MRN Enter the Medical Record Number of the patient.
Zone Select the area of the hospital where the patient stays. You can
define more options on the Dictionary page of the Setup
screen.
PID Enter the patient ID.
Bed No. Enter the bed No. of the patient.
Treated In Select the department in which the patient is treated medically.
Treated By Select the attending doctor of the patient.

Field Description
Diagnosis Select the diagnosis to the patient. You can define more options
on the Dictionary page of the Setup screen.
Race Select the race of the patient. You can define more options on
the Dictionary page of the Setup screen.
Birth Place Enter the name of place where the patient was born.
Tel. Enter the telephone number of the patient.
Address Enter the address where the patient lives currently.
Postal Code Enter the postal code of the patient.
Comment Enter doctor’s comments to the patient.
Reviewed By When the sample is analyzed, select the supervisor of the
clinical laboratory, who reviews and confirms the test results.
Conclusion Select the reviewing result to the sample result. It includes Pass
and Fail.
4. Select Save to save the settings.
5. To save the settings as defaults and apply them in following sample requesting,
select the Default button.
NOTE
When all options are set to defaults, the Sample ID, Bar Code, Test
D/T, Reviewed By and Conclusion are excluded.
6. To restore default settings of all options, select Restore.
7. When the sample is analyzed, select the reviewer and conclusion from the
drop-down list boxes, and then select the Review button to confirm the test result.
8. Use the navigation buttons to view and edit other samples as instructed below:
When you select… Then…

|<< The detailed information of the first sample on
current sample disk is displayed.
<< The detailed information of previous sample is
displayed.
>> The detailed information of next sample is
displayed.
>>| The detailed information of the last sample on
current sample disk is displayed.
9. Select Close to exit the Details dialog box.
4.5.1.2 Downloading Sample Information

The system provides a function that enables you to download samples from the LIS
host. Before downloading, make sure the following conditions are met:

The system is in Idle status; and
The system is connected to the LIS host; and
The system is enabled to download sample information from the LIS host.
1. Select Download on the Sample Request page. If the system is connected to

the LIS host correctly, the Download Sample Information dialog box is
displayed.
Figure4-7 Download Sample Information Dialog Box
2. Select one of the following options:
Field Description
Latest By selecting Latest, you can download from LIS all
samples of current day that have not been downloaded
yet.
All By selecting All, you can download all samples of
current day from LIS.
A Sample When selecting A Sample, you should enter the bar
code of the sample that you want to download. Then the
sample information will be downloaded to the analyzer.
If the sample already exists on the analyzer, no query
instruction will be sent to LIS and a prompt appears
indicating that the sample already exists.
3. Select OK. Corresponding sample information is downloaded from LIS.
NOTE
If error (like connection failure) occurs during downloading, the status
dialog box will be closed and a prompt appears indicating connection
error. However, the samples that are already downloaded completely
will be saved.
Invalid sample information due to incompletion or inexistent sample
cannot be downloaded.
4.5.1.3 Scanning Sample Bar Code

If the analyzer is equipped with a sample bar code reader, all samples on the sample
disk can be scanned when the system is in idle status.

1. Select Scan on the Sample Request page. The following dialog box is
displayed and will disappear when scanning is failed or finished.
Figure4-8 Scanning Status Dialog Box
2. When scanning is finished, the obtained bar code will correspond automatically
to the samples on the sample disk. If no sample information corresponds to the
scanned sample bar code and the LIS host is connected, the system will
download the sample information from LIS. If downloading failed, the sample will
be flagged abnormal.
4.5.1.4 Deleting a Sample

1. Select a sample from the Samples list on the Sample Request page and click
the Delete button. The Delete Samples dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-9 Confirm Dialog Box for Sample Deletion
2. Select one of the three options, which are explained below.
Select … To …
Current Sample Delete the sample currently selected on the
Sample Request page.
Samples on Current Disk Delete all samples on the current sample disk that
are being in Requested status.
All Requested Samples Delete all samples (including unpositioned ones)
on the six sample disks that are being in
Requested status.
3. Select OK. The specified samples are removed.

NOTE
Deleting a sample that will be run for over one time and is being
analyzed will invalidate and delete all its unfinished and pending
tests, allowing other tests to be calculated.
The Delete button does not apply to samples that are indicated by
Fin(Finished) or NReq(Not Requested).
4.5.1.5 Changing Sample Position

1. To move a sample to another position, select the sample in the Samples field of
the Sample Request page and select Move. The Change Sample Position
dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-10 Change Sample Position Dialog Box
2. Select the new sample disk and position where the sample is to be placed.
3. Move the sample to the new position you have set.
4. Select OK. The sample is transferred to the new position.
NOTE
In Testing, Pause and Sample Stop status, the pending or finished
samples cannot be moved.
Changing sample position can be performed when the system is
in Idle, Testing, Pause or Sample Stop status, however, the
pending samples must not be moved if the system is not idle.
4.5.1.6 Requesting Samples

Follow this procedure to request new samples or change requested samples:
1. In the Samples field of the Sample Request page, select a sample that is
indicated by # or select a requested sample.
2. Enter the sample information and select desired tests for the new sample, or
change the sample information and tests to the requested sample.
3. Select Request to request the new sample or to save the changes.

NOTE
When certain tests of the requested sample are deselected, click
Request. The confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to cancel the
tests.
4.5.1.7 Setting Defaults

1. Select Default on the Sample Request page. The Set Defaults dialog box is
displayed.
Figure4-11 Set Defaults Dialog Box
2. Select check boxes next to desired options whose settings on the Sample
Request page will be set to defaults for following sample requesting.
3. Select OK to save the settings.
4.5.2 Current
The system provides a feature that allows the user to view the results of samples that
are analyzed on the current day. The results can be reviewed in two modes: By
Sample and By Test.
The following sections introduce the two modes in detail.
4.5.2.1 Viewing Current Results by Sample

Select the Current tab to enter the Current page. By Sample is selected by default.

Figure4-12 Samples Screen, Current Page, By Sample
The P/H column of the Samples and Measurements lists tells you whether the
sample or test result has been printed or transferred to LIS. P stands for Print and H
for (LIS) host.
P/H Description
The sample or test result has been printed and
Y/Y
also transferred to LIS.
The sample or test result has been printed but not
Y/N
transferred to LIS.
The sample or test result has been transferred to
N/Y
LIS but not printed.
The sample or test result has neither been printed
N/N
nor transferred to LIS.
The following table explains the fields on the page.
Field Description
Type Type of the sample.
Charact. Characteristic of the sample.
Patient Name of the patient.
Gender Patient gender.
Bar Code Bar code information of the sample.
Date/Time Date and time when the sample was requested.
Final Result edited or corrected by the user. The default is the test result.
Result

Field Description
Test Result It refers to the latest measured result for a rerun test, the average
result for a test that has multiple replicates, and the latest
measured result for a single test. In case of an off-system test, it
means the firstly-entered result; for calculation tests, it means the
latest result.
The following table introduces the buttons on the page.
Button Function
Search Click this button to search desired measurement records on the
current day.
Refer to Searching Test Results in this section for details.
Edit Click this button to edit a measurement record that has a result, or
to add an off-system test.
Refer to Editing Results in this section for details.
Delete Select a sample in the Samples field of the Current page; then
click Delete to delete the desired unfinished tests and uncalculated
calculations tests and off-system tests.
Refer to Deleting Results in this section for details.
NOTE
As for the samples that are being analyzed, you
can only delete the unfinished tests.
Reac. Click this button to view the reaction curve of selected

Curve measurement record.
Refer to 4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve for details.
NOTE
If the selected measurement is a replicate run or
has replicate results, the Reac. Curve button will
be displayed in grey and the Replicates button is
available.
Details Select a sample in the Samples field of the Current page, then
select Details to view and edit the sample or patient information.
Refer to 4.5.1.1 Configuring Sample Information for detail.
Print/Send Select one or multiple samples in the Samples field of the Current
page, then select Print/Send to print out the test results or send
them to the LIS host.
Refer to Printing/Transferring Test Results in this section for
details.
Replicates Select a sample that is analyzed for over one time or has replicate
tests from the Samples field of the Current page and then select
Replicates. All replicate results of the sample are displayed.
Refer to Viewing Replicate Results in this section for details.

Button Function
Rerun Select a sample in the Samples field and then select desired tests.
Click Rerun to rerun the tests.
Refer to Rerun in this section for details.
NOTE
The Rerun button will be disabled in the following
conditions:
If no sample and test are selected on the Current
page; or
If the selected test is not on current sample disk or
the sample position has already been released.
Searching Test Results

1. Select Search on the Current page. The Conditions dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-13 Conditions Dialog Box
Field Description
Sample ID Enter the sample ID that you want to search.
Enter the start ID in the first edit box and end ID in the second
one.
Type Select the sample type from the drop-down list box.
Priority Select the priority of the samples. It includes void, Routine and
STAT.
Charact. Select the characteristic of the samples.

Field Description
Conclusion Select the reviewing result of the samples.
Name Enter the name of the patient.
Type Select a patient type from the drop-down list box. It includes two
default types: Inpatient and Outpatient.
Gender Select the patient gender.
Blood Type Select blood type of the patient.
MRN Enter the Medical Record Number of the patient.
Age Low Low limit of patient age.
Enter the age in the edit box and then select an age unit from the
drop-down list box.
Age High High limit of patient age.
Enter the age in the edit box and then select an age unit from the
drop-down list box.
Zone Select the area of the hospital where the patient stays.
PID Enter the patient ID.
Bed No. Enter the bed No. of the patient.
Pay Type Select the payment type of the patient. It includes Self-pay and
Social Security by default.
Sent From Select the department from which the sample is admitted.
Sent By Select the doctor who submits the sample.
Tested By Select the tester who analyzes the sample.
Treated In Select the department in which the patient is treated medically.
Treated By Select the attending doctor of the patient.
Reviewed By Select the supervisor of the clinical laboratory, who reviews and
confirms the test results.
3. Select Search. The qualified test results are displayed on the Current page.
4. To save the settings as defaults and apply them in following query, select the
Default button.
5. To restore default settings of all options, select Restore.
Editing Results
1. Select a sample in the Samples field of the Current page.
2. Select Edit on the Current page. The Edit Sample Results dialog box is
displayed.

Figure4-14 Edit Sample Results Dialog Box, Add Off-system Test
3. To add an off-system test to a sample, select the radio button to the left of Add
Off-system Test.
NOTE
The test that is not run on the current analyzer is considered as an
off-system test, which can be printed out in the patient report.
Field Description
Name Select an off-system test from the drop-down list box.
Sample ID Enter the ID of samples to which the off-system test is to be
added. The default is the selected sample ID.
NOTE
The start ID must not be greater than the end ID.
Date Set the date when the test was run. The default is the current
date.
Result Enter the result of the off-system test.
5. Select Save to add the off-system test.
6. To edit test result of a sample, select the radio button to the left of Edit Results.

Figure4-15 Edit Sample Results Dialog Box, Edit Results
7. Select desired tests from the list in the lower part of the Edit Sample Results
dialog box, then enter new results in the corresponding Final Result column.
8. Select Save to confirm the editing.
9. Select Close to exit the Edit Sample Results dialog box.
Deleting Results
1. Select a sample in the Samples field of the Current page.
2. Select Delete. The Delete Sample Results dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-16 Delete Sample Results Dialog Box
3. Select Delete. All unfinished tests, uncalculated calculation tests and off-system
tests of the sample are deleted. When all tests of the sample are deleted, the
sample will also be omitted and the sample position is released.
4. Select Close to exit the Delete Sample Results dialog box.

Rerunning a Test
For instructions of how to rerun a test, refer to 4.9.2.3 Rerunning a Test.
Viewing Reaction Curve
For instructions of how to view reaction curve, refer to 4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction
Curve.
Viewing/Editing Sample Information
For instructions of viewing and editing sample details, refer to 4.5.1.1 Configuring
Sample Information.
Printing/Transferring Test Results

1. Select the check boxes of one or multiple samples in the Samples field of the
Current page.
2. Select Print/Send. The Print/Send dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-17 Print/Send Dialog Box
3. Select desired option between Print Results and Send to LIS.
4. Select a content that you want to print out or transfer to LIS.
Select … To …
Selected Result of Current Print or transfer to LIS the selected test result of
Sample the current sample.
All Results of Current Print or transfer to LIS all test results of the current
Sample sample.
Samples Found Print or transfer to LIS all the test results that are
found meeting the configured conditions.

Select … To …
Specified Samples Print or transfer to LIS the test results of the
samples of the specified rows in the Samples list
on the Current page.
Enter the row No. of the samples in the edit box
below this option. The row No. may be input as 1,
2, or 3-6, etc.
NOTE
During printing, the tests that are masked or have no results calculated
will be excluded.
5. If you want to exclude the samples that have already been printed or transferred,
select the check box next to Ignore Printed/Transferred Samples.
6. Select OK, The specified test results are printed out or transferred to LIS.
Viewing Replicate Results

1. Select a sample that is analyzed for over 1 time or has rerun tests from the
Samples field of the Current page.
2. Select Replicates. The View Replicate Results dialog box is displayed,

showing all replicate test results of the sample.
Figure4-18 View Replicate Results Dialog Box
3. To view the reaction curve of a test, select a test from the list on the View
Replicate Results dialog box and select Reac. Curve. The Reaction Curve
dialog box is displayed. Refer to 4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve for more
information about the Reaction Curve dialog box.

4. To delete a test, select desired test from the list and then select Delete. The test
is deleted. Deleting an unfinished test will invalidate it and recalculate the
replicate times and final average result.
NOTE
The Delete button will be available only when unfinished tests are
selected.
For the detailed information of the data alarms displayed in the
Remark column, see Chapter 7.
5. Select Close to exit the View Replicate Results dialog box.
4.5.2.2 Viewing Current Results by Test

Select By Test on the Current page of the Samples screen, the following screen is
displayed.
Figure4-19 Samples Screen, Current Page, By Test
Field Description
Test Name of the test.
Test Type Type of the test. It includes Routine, Calculation, Off-system, ISE
and Serum.
Unit Unit of the test result.
Decimal Number of decimal places of the test result.
Std. No. Standard number of the test.
Full Name Full name of the test.

Field Description
Final Result edited or corrected by the user. The default is the test result.
Result
Test Result Result finally measured by the system. For off-system tests, it
means the firstly-entered result; for calculation tests, it means the
latest result.
Button Function
Search Click this button to search desired measurement records on the
current day.
Refer to Searching Test Results in 4.5.2.1 Viewing Current
Results by Sample for details.
Edit Click this button to edit test results of a test.
Refer to Editing Results in this section for details.
Recalculat Click this button to recalculate the results of a test on current day
e using the default calibration parameters.
Refer to Recalculating Results in this section for details.
Reac. Select a measurement record and select Reac. Curve to view the
Curve reaction curve.
Compen. Click this button to correct the results of a test.
Refer to Compensating Results in this section for details.
Print/Send Select one or multiple tests in the Tests field of the Current page,
then select Print/Send to print out the test results.
Replicates Click this button to view replicate results of a test.
Refer to Viewing Replicate Results in 4.5.2.1 Viewing Current
Results by Sample for details.
Editing Results
1. Select a test that has result in the Tests field of the Current page.
2. Select Edit. The Edit Test Results dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-20 Edit Test Results Dialog Box
3. Select desire sample in the Measurements list and enter new result in the Final
Result column.
4. Select Save. The test results of the corresponding samples are changed into the
new values.
5. Select Close to exit the Edit Test Results dialog box.
Recalculating Results
NOTE
Only the results of routine tests can be recalculated with their
calibration parameters.
1. Select a test (except for off-system and calculation test) in the Tests field of the
Current page.
2. Select Recalculate. The Recalculate Test Results dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-21 Recalculate Test Results Dialog Box
3. Select the check boxes to the left desired sample ID in the Measurements list.
4. Select Calculate. The test result for the samples is recalculated using the
default calibration parameters.
5. Select Close to exit the Recalculate Test Results dialog box.
Compensating Results
1. Select a test in the Tests field of the Current page.
2. Select Compen. The Compensate Test Results dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-22 Compensate Test Results Dialog Box

3. Enter the slope and intercept according to the compensation formula.
4. Select the check boxes of desired samples for which you want to correct the test
results.
5. Select Compensate. The test results for the samples are corrected using the
compensation formula.
6. If you want to set the compensation parameters (K and B) as defaults of the

current test, select Default.
7. Select Close to exit the Compensate Test Results dialog box.
4.5.3 History
To view the test results before the current day, select the History tab of the Samples
screen to enter the History page.
Figure4-23 Samples Screen, History Page
The History page is almost the same with the Current page except that the former
does not have rerunning function.
4.5.3.1 Viewing History Results by Sample

Refer to 4.5.2.1 Viewing Current Results by Sample for more details.
4.5.3.2 Viewing History Results by Test

Refer to 4.5.2.2 Viewing Current Results by Test for more details.
4.6 Reagents
This section explains how to set up reagents and request reagent blanks.

Select Reagents from the function buttons area of the main screen. The Reagents
screen is displayed with Reagent Setup as the default view.
The Reagents screen includes two tabs:
Reagent Setup
Reagent Blank
The following sections introduce the Reagents screen by tab.
4.6.1 Reagent Setup

Figure4-24 Reagents Screen, Reagent Setup Page
NOTE
All reagents of a test must be set on the same reagent disk. Otherwise,
the test cannot be requested.
The following table introduces the buttons on the Reagent Setup page.
Button Function
Reagent Click this button to add reagents or edit the reagent information.
Refer to Setting up Reagents in this section for details.
Scan Click this button to scan the reagents on current reagent disk.
Refer to Scanning Reagent in this section for details.
Release Click this button to release position of the selected reagent. Refer
to Releasing Reagent Position in this section for details.
Inventory Click this button to check remaining volume of the selected
reagent. Refer to Checking Reagent Inventory in this section
for details.

Button Function
Order Multiple reagent bottles may be prepared for one reagent type of
a test. You should set up the order in which the reagents are
aspirated during sample analysis. Select Order to set the
aspiration order of reagents. Refer to Setting Reagent Order in
this section for details.
Print Click this button to print out reagent information of all tests on
current reagent disk.
4.6.1.1 Setting up Reagents

1. Select the Reagent button on the Reagent Setup screen. The Reagent Setup
Figure4-25 Reagent Setup Dialog Box
2. Configure the following information:
Field Description
Disk Select a virtual reagent disk on which the reagent is to be
placed.
Position Select a position on the reagent disk to place the reagent.
Size Select the bottle type of the reagent. It includes OC(outer circle)
20ml, OC 40ml, IC(inner circle) 40ml and IC 62ml.
Test Select a test from the drop-down list box.
Rgt. Type Select a reagent type for the test from the drop-down list box. It
includes R1 and R2.
Sharing Select a test which shares the reagent with the above
mentioned test.
Only one sharing test can be set up for each reagent.

Field Description
Rgt. Type Select a reagent type for the sharing test. It includes R1 and R2.
Lot No. Enter the lot No. of the reagent.
Bottle No. Enter the bottle No. of the reagent.
Exp. Date Select the expiration date of the reagent.
NOTE
The tests that use expired reagents cannot be
requested.
Bar Code Bar code information on the reagent bottle. You can enter it
manually or scan it via a hand-held bar code reader.
3. Select Save to save your settings.
4. Select Close to exit the Reagent Setup dialog box.
4.6.1.2 Scanning Reagent Bar Code
NOTE
The Scan button on the Reagent Setup page will not be available if:
No reagent bar code reader is installed on the analyzer; or
The system is in Testing status.
1. Select Scan on the Reagent Setup screen. The Scan Reagents dialog box is
displayed.
Figure4-26 Scan Reagents Dialog Box
2. Select one of the following two options:
All Positions: To scan all positions on the current reagent disk;
Specified Positions: To scan the specified positions on the reagent disk. You
should enter the start and end positions in the edit boxes.

NOTE
The start number must not be greater than the end number, and the
position No. you enter must not exceed the total reagent positions of
the reagent disk.
3. Select OK. The specified reagent positions are scanned and then displayed in
the Reagent Status list on the Reagent Setup page.
4.6.1.3 Releasing Reagent Position
NOTE
Reagents for requested tests cannot be released.
1. Select a test in the Reagent Status list of the Reagent Setup page.
2. Select Release. The Release Reagent Position dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-27 Release Reagent Position Dialog Box
3. Select one of the following three options:
Reagent on Selected Position: To release the selected reagent position;
All Reagents for Selected Test: To release all reagents of the selected test;
All Unapplied Reagents: To release all reagents that are not applied
4. Select desired option and select OK. The corresponding reagent positions are
released.
4.6.1.4 Checking Reagent Inventory
NOTE
Checking reagent inventory is not allowed if the system is not idle.
1. Select a test in the Reagent Status list of the Reagent Setup page.
2. Select Inventory. The Check Reagent Inventory dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-28 Check Reagent Inventory Dialog Box
3. Select any of the five options on the dialog box:
Option Description
Selected Position To check the remaining volume of reagent
on the selected position.
All Reagents for Selected Test To check the remaining volume of all
reagents for the selected test.
Reagents for All Tests To check the remaining volume of reagents
for all tests on current reagent disk.
All Positions To check the remaining volume of reagents
on all positions of current reagent disk.
If reagent is detected on a position that is
not set, all reagent information for the
position is displayed as “????” in the
Reagent Status list of the Reagent Setup
page.
Specified Positions To check the remaining volume of the
specified reagents. You should enter the
start and end reagent number in the edit
boxes.
4. Select OK. The remaining volume of the reagents is checked and displayed in
the Reagent Status list on the Reagent Setup page.
NOTE
The system is in Maintaining status while checking reagent inventory;
and other motion operation of the system is not allowed.
4.6.1.5 Setting Reagent Order

The system allows multiple reagent bottles prepared for one reagent type. You should
set the order by which the reagents are used during sample analysis. When one
reagent bottle is used up, the system will switch to the next successive reagent bottle
automatically.

1. Select Order on the Reagent Setup screen. The Reagent Order Setup dialog
box is displayed.
Figure4-29 Reagent Order Setup Dialog Box
2. Select the following information:
Disk
Test
Rgt. Type(reagent type)
3. All reagents for the selected test on current reagent disk are displayed in the lower
list of the Reagent Order Setup dialog box.
4. Use the navigation buttons to move the reagents:
Button Function
|< Click this button to move selected reagent to the first position.
<< Click this button to move selected reagent to the previous
position.
>> Click this button to move selected reagent to the next position.
>| Click this button to move selected reagent to the last position.
6. Select Close to exit the Reagent Order Setup dialog box.
4.6.1.6 Viewing Reagent Information

1. Select a reagent disk from the Disk drop-down list box on the Reagent Setup
page.
2. All reagent information on the reagent disk is displayed in the Reagent Status list.
3. Select By Position or By Test to view the reagent information as needed.
4. Move the vertical and horizontal bars to display the hidden contents of the list.

4.6.2 Reagent Blank
Select the Reagent Blank tab from the Reagents screen. The Reagent Blank page
is displayed. You can request reagent blanks for desired tests or view history reagent
blank results.
4.6.2.1 Request Blanks

Select the radio box next to Request Blanks on the Reagent Blank page. The
Request Blanks window is displayed.
Figure4-30 Reagents Screen, Reagent Blank Page, Request Blanks
NOTE
In the Tests field, the test boxes are indicated by different colors,
which are described below.
The tests that are not configured correctly will appear in grey. When
you move the mouse pointer on the tests or profiles, a popup message
is displayed showing the reason why the tests or profiles can not be
requested.
Reagent position is not assigned Set the position of the reagent.
Sample volume not configured Set the sample volume.
stated above.

The following table introduces the buttons on the window.
Button Function
Request After selecting desired tests in the Tests list, select this button to
order reagent blanks for them.
To run the reagent blanks, see 4.1 Start for details.
NOTE
When reagent blanks are requested, the system
will run the reagent blanks of current sample disk
automatically while analyzing other samples. If the
system is in Idle or Pause status, run the reagent
blanks in the same way as routine samples. See
4.1 Start.
Delete Select a test from the Reagent Blanks field, and then select
Delete to delete reagent blank requisition for the test.
Cancel After selecting desired tests in the Tests list, select this button to
cancel the selection.
4.6.2.2 View Blank Results

Select the radio box next to View Blank Results on the Reagent Blank page. The
View Blank Results window is displayed.
Figure4-31 Reagents Screen, Reagent Blank Page, View Blank Results
Button Function
Search Click this button to search for reagent blank data and graphic
trend during specific period.

Button Function
Print Click this button to print reagent blank data and graphic trend of
the selected test.
Reac. Curve Click this button to view reaction curve of the selected test.
Searching Reagent Blanks

1. Select the start date and end date in the Conditions area of the View Blank
Results window. The default is the current date.
2. Select a test from the list below the date drop-down list boxes.
3. Select Search. All reagent blanks for the test are displayed in the list in the middle
of the Reagent Blank page.
4. You can view the reagent blanks By Tabular Data or By Graphic Trend.
Printing Reagent Blank Results

1. Select the start date and end date in the Conditions area of the Reagent Blank
page and select a test in the list below.
2. Select Search. All reagent blanks for the test are displayed in the list in the middle
of the page.
3. Select Print. All reagent blank results (tabular data and graphic trend) of the test
are printed out.

1. Select a test from the list below the date drop-down list box on the View Blank
Results window..

2. Select Reac. Curve. The Reagent Blank Reaction Curve dialog box is displayed.
4.7 Calibration
Select Calibration from the function buttons area of the main screen. The
Calibration screen is displayed with the Calib. Request tab as the default view.
There are five tabs on the screen:
Calib. Request
Status
Results
Calib. Data
ISE
The following sections introduce the Calibration screen by tab.
4.7.1 Calibration Request

Figure4-32 Calibration Screen, Calib. Request Page
CAUTION
You should run the calibration again in the following conditions:
When reagent lot is changed;
When test parameters are changed;
When the photometric lamp is replaced.
NOTE
In the Tests field, the tests are indicated by different colors, which are
described below.

you move the mouse pointer on a test, a popup message is displayed
showing the reason why the test can not be requested.
Reagent position is not Set the position of the reagent.
assigned
Calibration rule is not set Set the calibration rule on the
ParametersÆTestÆCalibration
window.
Calibrator position is not Set the calibrator position on the
assigned ParametersÆTestÆCalibration
window.
Not enough calibrator Refill more calibrator.
Calibrator expired Reset the calibrator.
stated above.
1. Select a sample disk from the drop-down list box of the Calibrations area.
2. Select desired tests that you want to calibrate in the Tests list on upper right
corner of the page.
3. Select Request. Calibrations are requested for the tests.
4. To delete a calibration run, select a test in the Calibrations area and select
Delete.
NOTE
You can only delete the calibrations that are in the following status:
Req(Requested), Pen(Pending), InP(In Progress) and Abn(Abnormal).
5. To run the calibrations, see 4.1 Start for details.
4.7.2 Status
Select the Status tab from the Calibration screen. The Status page is displayed.
You can view the running status of calibration on current day and the reaction curve
and calibration curve.

Figure4-33 Calibration Screen, Status Page
Field Description
Disk Select a virtual sample disk that you want to view calibration
status.
Rule Calibration rule of selected test.
Replicate Times that the selected test is run.
The following table introduces the buttons on the screen.
Button Function
Rerun Click this button to rerun the selected calibrators. Refer to
Rerunning Calibrators in this section for details.
Reac. Curve Click this button to view the reaction curve of the selected test.
Refer to Viewing Reaction Curve in this section for details.
Calib. Curve Click this button to view the calibration curve of the selected
test. Refer to Viewing Calibration Curve in this section for
details.
Rerunning Calibrators
Select one or multiple finished calibrators from the Calibration Runs area of the
Status page, then select Rerun. The system analyzes the calibrators again and
recalculates the calibration parameters.

Select a test and then a calibrator from the Calibration Runs area of the Status
page, then select Reac. Curve. The Calibration Reaction Curve dialog box is
displayed.

For more information about the reaction curve dialog box, refer to 4.9.2.4 Viewing
Reaction Curve.
Viewing Calibration Curve

Select a calibrated test from the Calibrations area of the Status page and select
Calib. Curve. The Calibration Curve dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-34 Calibration Curve Dialog Box
The following table introduces the buttons on the dialog box.
Button Function
<< Click this button to view the calibration curve of first test.
< Click this button to view the calibration curve of previous test.
> Click this button to view the calibration curve of next test.
>> Click this button to view the calibration curve of last test.
Adjust Select Adjust. The Adjust Curve Range dialog box is displayed.
Enter the X-coordinate range and Y-coordinate range in the edit
boxes. Select OK to save the settings. The calibration curve will be
refreshed automatically.
Print Click this button to print the current calibration curve.
Close Click this button to close the dialog box.
NOTE
The Calib. Curve button is not available for the tests that are not
calibrated successfully or not finished.

4.7.3 Results
Select the Results tab from the Calibration screen. The Results page is displayed.
You can review the calibration results and curve of each test, and recalculate
calibration parameters with other calibration rule.
Figure4-35 Calibration Screen, Results Page
Field Description
Date From Start date for reviewing calibration results.
To End date for reviewing calibration results.
Tests Select a test whose calibration results you want to review.
Button Function
Search Select the start date and end date and select a test from the Tests
field. Then click Search. The qualified calibration results of the test
are displayed in the Calibration Results list.
Calib. Select a result from the Calibration Results list and select Calib.
Curve Curve. The calibration curve of the result is displayed. Refer to
Viewing Calibration Curve in 4.7.2 Status for details.
NOTE
The Calib. Curve button is available only when the
selected result is Succeeded or Calculated.

Button Function
Reac. Select a result from the Calibration Results list and select a
Curve calibrator in the Calibrator Data area. Click Reac. Curve. The
reaction curve of the calibrator for the selected test is displayed. For
more information about the reaction curve dialog box, refer to
4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve.
NOTE
The Reac. Curve button is available only when the
selected result is Succeeded or Calculated.
Recal. This button only applies to the calibrations that are Succeeded or
Failed. By selecting Recal. you can recalculate the calibration
parameters or correct them with latest reagent blank result.
Refer to Recalculating Calibration Parameters in this section for
details.
Edit Click this button to add or edit linear calibration parameters.
Refer to Editing Calibration Parameters in this section for details.
Delete Select a result from the Calibration Results list and select Delete.
The selected result is deleted.
NOTE
You’re forbidden to delete the calibration results that
are indicated by Succeeded.
Default Select a result from the Calibration Results list and select Default.
The calibration parameters of the result are set to default
parameters for the test.
NOTE
Failed calibration results must not be set to default.
Each test can have only one default calibration
parameter.
Default calibration result must not be deleted.
Print Click this button to print all calibration results and parameters that
are currently searched.
Send Click this button to send currently-searched calibration results and
parameters to the LIS host.
Recalculating Calibration Parameters

1. Select a Succeeded or Failed result from the Calibration Results list of the
Results page.
2. Select Recal.. The Recalculate Calibration Parameters is displayed.

Figure4-36 Recalculate Calibration Parameters Dialog Box
3. Select desired calibration rule that you want to recalculate the calibration
parameters.
4. Select the check boxes to the left of desired calibrators.
NOTE
The number of calibrators should accord with the calibration rule.
5. Select Calculate. The calibration parameters are calculated using the new rule
and displayed in the Parameter list.
6. Select Close to exit the Recalculate Calibration Parameters dialog box.
Editing Calibration Parameters

1. Select a result from the Calibration Results list of the Results page.
2. Select Edit. The Edit Calibration Parameters dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-37 Edit Calibration Parameters Dialog Box
3. Select a calibration rule from the Rule drop-down list box.

4. Enter the new K (slope) and R0 (intercept).
5. Select Save. The new calibration parameters are saved, replacing the old ones.
6. Select Close to exit the Edit Calibration Parameters dialog box.
Transferring Calibration Parameters and Results

1. Select Send from the bottom area of the Results page. The Send dialog box is
displayed.
Figure4-38 Send calibration parameters Dialog Box
2. Select any of the three options:
Selected Parameters;
All Parameters;
Parameter in Specified Row: You should end the row No. in the following edit
box.
3. Select OK. The specified calibration parameters are sent to the LIS host.
4.7.4 Calibration Data

Select the Calib. Data tab from the Calibration screen. The Calib. Data page is
displayed. You can review the test data of a calibrator and the graphic statistics of the
data.

Figure4-39 Calibration Screen, Calib. Data Page
On the Calib. Data page you can view the calibration data in two modes: By Tabular
Statistics and By Graphic Statistics.
Field Description
Date From Select the start date for reviewing calibration data.
To Select the end date for reviewing calibration data.
Test Select a test whose calibration results you want to view.
Calibrator Select a calibrator to view the calibration data.
Button Function
Search After selecting the date range, test and calibrator, select Search.
The qualified results are displayed in the lower right area of the
page. Select By Tabular Statistics or By Graphic Statistics to
view the data.
Print Click this button to print out the currently-displayed tabular statistics
or graphic statistics.
4.7.5 ISE
NOTE
The ISE tab of the Calibration screen will be invisible if your analyzer
is not equipped with the ISE module.

Select the ISE tab from the Calibration screen. The ISE page is displayed. You can
perform ISE calibrations, and review history calibration results and trend curve on this
page.
Figure4-40 Calibration Screen, ISE Page
The following table explains the field on the page.
Field Description
Latest The latest calibration result and date/time for selected analyte is
Calibration displayed.
The following table introduces the buttons on the screen
Button Function
Calibrate Select an ISE analyte and select Calibrate. The ISE module
calibrates the corresponding electrode immediately. Please note
that you must perform this task when the system is in idle status.
Search Select an ISE Analyte and then the date range in the Date area,
select Search. The qualified calibration results are displayed in
the list below the date area. The trend curve is produced
according to the average calibration result of each day and
shown in the Graphic Trend area.
Print Click this button to print out the searched history calibration result
and graphic trend.
4.8 QC
Select QC from the function buttons area of the main screen. The QC screen is
displayed with QC Request as the default tab. On this screen you can request quality
controls and review the real-time, daily and day to day QC results.

The QC screen includes four tabs:
QC Request
Real-time
Daily
Day to Day
The following sections introduce the QC screen by tab.
4.8.1 QC Request
On the QC Request page you can request quality control runs for each test.
Figure4-41 QC Screen, QC Request Page
NOTE
In the Tests field, the tests are indicated by different colors, which are
described below.
you move the mouse pointer on a test, a popup message is displayed
showing the reason why the test can not be requested.
Reagent position is not Set the position of the reagent.
assigned
QC rule is not set Set the QC rule on the
ParametersÆTestÆQC window.

Control position is not assigned Set the control position on the
ParametersÆTestÆQC window.
Not enough control Refill more control.
Control expired Reset the control.
stated above.
1. Select a sample disk from the drop-down list box of the QCs area.
2. Select desired tests that you want to run quality control in the Tests list on upper
right corner of the page.
3. Select Request. Quality controls are requested for the tests.
4. To delete a QC run, select a test in the QCs area and select Delete.
NOTE
You can only delete the QCs that are in Req(requested) or
Pen(pending) status.
4.8.2 Real-time
Select the Real-time tab from the QC screen, the Real-time page is displayed. You
can view QC status and results on current day, and the real-time graph of latest 10
QC points for each test.
Figure4-42 QC Screen, Real-time Page

Field Description
Rule Select a QC rule for searching results. There are two options
available: Westgard Multi-rule and Twin-Plot
When selecting Westgard Multi-rule, you must select 1
to 3 controls to view the QC graph;
When selecting Twin-Plot, you must select 2 controls to
view the QC graph. The QC results will not be judged
automatically.
Button Function
Refresh Select a QC rule from the drop-down list box and select a
control in the list below. Click Refresh to update the QC
graph and result according to selected rule and control
solution.
Comment Select a QC result from the QC Runs list and select
Comment. The Comments dialog box pops up.
In the Comments field enter your remarks for the QC result,

then select Save. To include this QC point when viewing the
QC graph or printing the QC results, select the check box to
the left of Show/Print This QC Point.
Reac. Curve Select a QC result from the QC Runs list and select Reac.
Curve. The QC Reaction Curve dialog box is displayed.
For more information about the reaction curve dialog box,
refer to 4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve.
Calculate To calculate a QC run of a test that has no result, select
Calculate. The QC result is calculated using the latest
calibration parameters.
If the test is not calibrated or has no calibration parameter (K
factor), the Calculate button will be disabled.
Print Click this button to print out the currently-displayed real-time
QC graph.

Button Function
Adjust Select Adjust. The Adjust Curve Range dialog box pops
up.
Enter the X-coordinate range and Y-coordinate range in the
edit boxes. Select OK to save the settings. The QC graph will
be refreshed automatically.
Send Select Send. The Send dialog box pops up.
Select the check box of the desired option:
Selected Results
All Results of Selected Test
Select OK. The corresponding QC results are sent to the LIS
host.
NOTE
The QC runs that are not finished or calculated will be marked ‘N’ in
the Print column and must not be changed.
The QC runs with ‘N’ in the Print column of QC Runs list will not be
counted for daily QC and day to day QC.
4.8.3 Daily
Select the Daily tab from the QC screen, the Daily page is displayed. You can view
the QC status and results of each test on current day.
Figure4-43 QC Screen, Daily Page
On the Daily page you can view the QC results in two modes: By QC Graph and By
Tabular Data.

The following tab explains the fields on the page.
Field Description
Date Select the date for reviewing QC results.
Test Select a test for reviewing QC results.
Rule Select a QC rule for reviewing QC results. There are three QC
rules available:
Westgard Multi-rule: You should set 1 to 3 controls;
Cum. Sum Check: You should set 1 control;
Twin-Plot: You should set 2 controls.
Result QC judgment result of the selected test on current day.
This field does not apply to the Twin-Plot rule and displays blank.
Button Function
Search Select the date, test, QC rule and controls, then select Search. The
qualified results are displayed in the lower right list of the page.
Select By QC Graph or By Tabular Data to view the results.
Comment Select a QC result from the lower right list and select Comment.
The Comments dialog box pops up.
In the Comments field enter your remarks for the QC result, then
select Save. To include this QC point when viewing the QC graph or
printing the QC results, select the check box to the left of
Show/Print This QC Point.
Reac. Select a QC result from the lower right list and select Reac. Curve.
Curve The QC Reaction Curve dialog box is displayed.
For more information about the reaction curve dialog box, refer to
4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve.

Button Function
Calculate To calculate a QC run of a test that has no result, select Calculate.
The QC result is calculated using the latest calibration parameters.
If the test is not calibrated or has no calibration parameter (K factor),
the Calculate button will be disabled.
Print Click this button to print out the currently-displayed daily QC graph.
Adjust Select Adjust. The Adjust Curve Range dialog box pops up.
boxes. Select OK to save the settings. The QC graph will be
Selected Results
Select OK. The corresponding QC results are sent to the LIS host.
NOTE
The QC runs with ‘N’ in the Print column of the result list will not be
counted for daily QC.
4.8.4 Day to Day

Select the Day to Day tab from the QC screen, the Day to Day page is displayed.
You can view the QC status and results of each test during a period.
Figure4-44 QC Screen, Day to Day Page

On the Day to Day page you can view the QC results in two modes: By QC Graph
and By Tabular Data.
Field Description
Date From Select the start date for searching QC runs.
To Select the end date for searching QC runs.
Test Select a test for searching QC runs.
Rule Select a QC rule for reviewing QC results. There are three QC
rules available:
Westgard Multi-rule: You should set 1 to 3 controls;
Cum. Sum Check: You should set 1 control;
Twin-Plot: You should set 2 controls.
Button Function
Search Select the date range, test, QC rule and controls, then select
Search. The qualified results are displayed in the lower right list of
the page. Select By QC Graph or By Tabular Data to view the
results.
Comment Select a QC result from the lower right list and select Comment.
The Comments dialog box pops up.
In the Comments field enter your remarks for the QC result, then
select Save. To include this QC point when viewing the QC graph or
printing the QC results, select the check box to the left of
Show/Print This QC Point.
Print Click this button to print out the currently-displayed day-to-day QC
graph.
Adjust Click Adjust. The Adjust Curve Range dialog box is displayed.
boxes. Select OK to save the settings. The QC graph will be

Button Function
Selected Results
Select OK. The corresponding QC results are sent to the LIS host.
4.9 Status
The system possesses a feature to show the status information (calibration, sample,
reagent, QC and maintenance) that requires user’s attention and allows the user to
view the status on the sample disk, reagent disk and reaction disk.
Select Status from the function buttons area of the main screen. The Status screen
is displayed with Tips page as the default view.
The Status screen includes four tabs:
Tips
Sample Disk
Reagent Disk
Reaction Disk
The following sections introduce the Status screen by tab.
4.9.1 Tips
On the Tips page displays the general status of the system, showing the
measurement information that the user should pay attention to.
Figure4-45 Status Screen, Tips Page

Field Description
Recalibration In this field includes the tests that should be recalibrated due to
the following reasons:
Calibration period expired; or
Test parameters changed; or
Calibration settings changed; or
Reagent replaced, etc
When the tests can not be shown in the list view, select and
to view the hidden tests.
To recalibrate the tests, select any test box. The Calib. Request
page is displayed. You can request calibrations for the tests as
instructed by 4.7.1 Calibration Request.
Sample In this field shows the 6 virtual sample disks, as well as the
Status requested, in-progress, finished, STAT and abnormal samples
on the disks.
The samples in different status are indicated by the following
colors:
Req(requested): Transparent
InP(in progress): Green
Fin(finished): Blue
STAT: Yellow
Abn(Abnormal): Red
Select any of the sample disks in this field. The Sample Disk
page of the Status screen is displayed. Refer to 4.9.2 Sample
Disk for details.
Reagent In this field shows the reagents that cannot be used due to
Status insufficient inventory, expiration, etc.
Select any of the reagent disks in this field. The Reagent Setup
page is displayed. Refer to 4.6.1 Reagent Setup for details.
QC Status In this field lists the tests whose real-time QC results are
abnormal or warned. The tests are indicated by two colors:
Yellow: Warning in quality control
Red: Out of control
Select any test box in this field. The Real-time page of the QC
screen is displayed. Refer to 4.8.2 Real-time for details.
Maintenance In this field displays the regular maintenance operations that
should be performed.
Select any maintenance box in this field. The Daily Maint. page
of the Utilities screen is displayed. Refer to 4.13.1 Daily Maint
for details.

4.9.2 Sample Disk
Select the Sample Disk tab from the Status screen. The Sample Disk page is
displayed. You can view the status of the sample disk, each sample position and
requested samples.
Figure4-46 Status Screen, Sample Disk Page
The simulated sample disk graph is shown in the middle of the page. Select a sample
position on the graph. The detailed information about the sample (calibrator or control)
is displayed on the right-hand column of the page.
The status to the left of the sample disk graph is described below:
Area Status Color Description

Running Idle Grey No sample or calibrator is to be
status analyzed.
Requested&Pending Green The sample or calibrator is
requested and in pending status.
In Progress Bright The sample or calibrator is being
green analyzed.
Finished Blue The sample or calibrator has
been analyzed.
Article Empty White No tube is placed.
type
Routine Green Routine sample
STAT Red Emergent sample
Control Blue Control solution
Calibrator Yellow Calibrator
Depleted Dark grey The sample, control or calibrator
on this position has been run out.

Illegal Black Sample is scanned but no
sample information is associated
with the bar code, or wrong bar
code is scanned.
Other Light blue Wash solution, urine diluent or
water
Button Function
Change Pos. Click this button to move the selected sample to another
position. Please note that calibrators and controls must not be
moved.
See 4.9.2.1 Changing Sample Position for details.
Release Click this button to release one or all positions on which the
samples have been analyzed.
Please note that calibrators, controls and unfinished samples
are excluded.
See 4.9.2.2 Releasing Sample Position for details.
Rerun Click this button to rerun a finished test in the lower-right list of
the page.
See 4.9.2.3 Rerunning for details.
Reac. Curve Click this button to view reaction curve of the selected test in the
lower-right list of the page.
See 4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve for details.
Refresh After refilling a sample, click this button to refresh the sample to
full.
See 4.9.2.5 Refreshing Sample Volume for details.
4.9.2.1 Changing Sample Position
NOTE
Calibrators or controls must not be moved to other positions.
1. Select a sample on the sample disk graph.
2. Select Chang Pos. The Change Sample Position dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-47 Change Sample Position Dialog Box
3. Select the new sample disk and desired position for the sample.
4. Move the sample to the new position you have set.
5. Select OK. The sample is moved to the new position.
4.9.2.2 Releasing Sample Position
NOTE
Positions of calibrators and controls must not be released.
Positions of unfinished samples must not be released.
Released samples cannot be run again. Please think twice before
releasing.
1. Select a finished sample on the sample disk graph.
2. Select Release. The Release Sample Position dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-48 Release Sample Position Dialog Box
3. Select any of the two options:
Selected Position: To release the selected sample position;
All Positions: To release positions on which the samples are finished.
4. Select OK. Corresponding sample position(s) is released.
4.9.2.3 Rerunning a Test

1. Select a finished sample on the sample disk graph and select a test from the
Test Result list.

2. Select Rerun to pop up the Rerun dialog box.
Figure4-49 Rerun Dialog Box
3. Select one of the following options:
Field Description
Standard Rerun the selected sample with the standard sample volume
on ParametersÆTestÆBasics window.
Dilute Rerun the selected sample with the diluted sample volume
on ParametersÆTestÆBasics window.
Increase Rerun the selected sample with the increased sample
volume on ParametersÆTestÆBasics window.
Increase and Rerun the selected sample with the increased and diluted
Dilute sample volume on ParametersÆTestÆBasics window.
Decrease Rerun the selected sample with the decreased sample
volume on ParametersÆTestÆBasics window.
Decrease and Rerun the selected sample with the decreased and diluted
Dilute sample volume on ParametersÆTestÆBasics window.
Custom When selecting Custom, you should enter the dilution ratio
and sample volume in the following edit boxes.
4. Select OK. The test is rerun in the selected mode and the new test result
overwrites the original one.
4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve

Select a test from the Test Result list of the Sample Disk screen, then select Reac.
Curve. The Sample Reaction Curve dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-50 Sample Reaction Curve Dialog Box
NOTE
Contents on the reaction curve dialog box vary from samples, which
include calibrator, control and patient sample.
The following table explains the fields on the dialog box.
Field Description
Phase Stage of the reaction data. In includes BLANK (water blank and
cuvette blank), R1, S, R2, R3, R4 and END. BLANK will not be
displayed on the reaction curve.
Pri. Absorbance at primary wavelength. The number of decimal
places is 4.
Sec. Absorbance at secondary wavelength. The number of decimal
places is 4.
Filter (None) View reaction curve of all searched test results.
Filter (Test) View reaction curve of the results for the selected test.
Filter View reaction curve of the test results for the selected sample
(Sample) (sample ID, control and calibrator).

The following table introduces the buttons on the Sample Reaction Curve dialog
box.
Button Function
Navigation Use these buttons to view reaction curve of the test results
Buttons based on the filter condition.
(|<<,<<,>>,>>|)
|<<: To view the reaction curve of first test for selected sample;
<<: To view the reaction curve of previous test for selected
sample;
>>: To view the reaction curve of next test for selected sample;
|>>: To view the reaction curve of last test for selected sample
Data Select Data to display the Reaction Data dialog box.
Select Close to close the dialog box.

Print Click this button to print current reaction curve.
Close Click this button to close the dialog box.
4.9.2.5 Refreshing Sample Volume

When a sample is run out during measurement and needed for other tests, you can
use the refresh function to continue the analysis.
Perform the following steps to refresh sample volume:
1. Refill sample for the specified position(s).
2. Select the sample position on the Sample Disk page of the Status screen, and
then click Refresh. The Refresh dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-51 Refresh (sample volume) Dialog Box
3. Select an option between Selected Position and All Positions.
4. Select OK. The system refreshes the specified samples to full.
4.9.3 Reagent Disk

Select the Reagent Disk tab from the Status screen. The Reagent Disk page is
displayed. You can view the status of the reagent disk, each reagent and configured
reagents.
Figure4-52 Status Screen, Reagent Disk Page
The simulated reagent disk graph is shown in the middle of the page. Select a
reagent position on the graph. The detailed information about the reagent is
displayed on the right-hand column of the page.
The status to the left of the reagent disk graph is described below:
Status Color Description

Empty Grey No reagent bottle is placed.
DT water White Distilled water
Detergent Purple Acid or alkaline wash solution
R1 Green First reagent

R2 Red Second reagent
R3 Blue Third reagent
R4 Yellow Fourth reagent
Shared Orange Reagent on this position is shared by two tests.
Illegal Black Position is not configured or no reagent is scanned, but
reagent is found on this position during inventory check.
Button Function
Inventory Click this button to check the remaining volume of the selected
reagent. This buttons is not available when the system is in
Testing or Sample Stop status.
Change Pos. Click this button to move the selected reagent to another
position. Distilled water and wash solution must not be moved.
This buttons is not available when the system is in Testing or
Sample Stop status.
Refresh After refilling a reagent, click this button to refresh the reagent to
full.
See 4.9.3.3 Refreshing Reagent Volume for details.
4.9.3.1 Checking Reagent Inventory
NOTE
Inventory check cannot be performed to illegal articles or empty
positions on the reagent disk.
The Inventory button is not available when the system is in Testing
status, however, you can check the inventory of the reagent after
pausing the analysis. Photometric measurement will not be influenced
during inventory check.
1. Select a reagent disk from the drop-down list box on the right of Disk.
2. Select a reagent on the reagent disk graph.
3. Select Inventory. The system checks the remaining volume of the reagent and
refreshes the corresponding Inventory column of the Tests list.
4.9.3.2 Changing Reagent Position
NOTE
You’re not allowed to move the following articles to another position:
Distilled water and wash solution;
Reagents that are being used during testing;
Reagents that are requested but not included in the Tests list;
Reagents of other types for the same test.

1. Select a reagent on the reagent disk graph.
2. Select Change Pos. to pop up the Change Reagent Position dialog box.
Figure4-53 Change Reagent Position Dialog Box
3. Select the new reagent disk and desired position for the reagent.
4. Move the reagent to the new position you have set.
5. Select OK. The reagent is moved to the new position.
4.9.3.3 Refreshing Reagent Volume

When a reagent is run out during measurement and needed for other tests, you can
use the refresh function to continue the analysis.
Perform the following steps to refresh reagent volume:
1. Refill reagent for the specified position(s).
2. Select the reagent position on the Reagent Disk page of the Status screen, and
then click Refresh. The Refresh dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-54 Refresh (reagent volume) Dialog Box
3. Select an option between Selected Position and All Positions.
4. Select OK. The system refreshes the specified reagents to full.
4.9.4 Reaction Disk

Select the Reaction Disk tab from the Status screen. The Reaction Disk page is
displayed. You can view the general status of the disk and all cuvettes (such as
cleaning, sampling, etc) as well as the reaction curve of valid measurement (sample
run, calibration, QC, sample blank, reagent blank).

Figure4-55 Status Screen, Reaction Disk Page
The simulated reaction disk graph is shown in the middle of the page. Select a
cuvette position on the graph. The detailed sample and measurement information in
the cuvette are displayed on the right-hand column of the page.
The status to the left of the reaction disk graph is described below:
Status Color Description

Pending Dark grey The cuvette is not washed and occupied.
Washing Grey The cuvette is being washed during the first 6 phases.
Water blank is run at the 6th phase and can identify the
dirty cuvettes.
Dirty Brown The cuvette is not cleaned or occupied by waste.
Idle White Clean cuvette
R1 Green Dispensing first reagent
S Red Dispensing sample
R2 Bright Dispensing second reagent
green
R3 Light Dispensing third reagent
cyan
R4 Cyan Dispensing fourth reagent
END1 Orange Measurement is finished without calculating results (no
calibration result).
END2 Yellow Measurement is finished with results calculated.

The following table introduces the button on the page.
Button Function
Reac. Curve Select a cuvette position on which the measurement is
finished. The corresponding reaction disk dialog box pops up.
For more information about the reaction curve dialog box, refer
to 4.9.2.4 Viewing Reaction Curve.
NOTE
The Reac. Curve button is not available when:
The selected cuvette holds diluted sample; or
The selected cuvette is empty.
4.10 Statistics
Select Statistics from the function buttons area of the main screen. The Statistics
screen is displayed with Worklist page as the default view. You can view request
information of samples and tests, measurement results, workload of tester and
sender, and measurement charges.
The Statistics screen includes four tabs:
Worklist
Results
Workload
Charges
The following sections introduce the Statistics screen by tab.
4.10.1 Worklist
1. On the Worklist page of the Statistics screen, you can view test requisitions and
reagent application for each test during a period, and sample requisitions and
measurement results.

Figure4-56 Statistics Screen, Worklist Page
2. Select a mode to view the statistic information of measurements.
By Sample: To view all requested samples and measurement results;
By Test: To view test requisitions and reagent volume for each test
3. Select or enter the start date and end date in the Date field.
4. Select Execute. All samples or tests requested during the period are displayed in
the middle list of the Worklist page. The total number of replicates, finished tests,
off-system tests, calculation tests and ISE analytes are displayed in the column
below the test list.
5. Select Print to print out the currently-displayed statistic information of

measurements.
4.10.2 Results
1. Select the Results tab to enter the Results page, where you can view the
measurement trends of a test during a period and print the statistic data and
graphic trend.

Figure4-57 Statistics Screen, Results Page
2. Select or enter the start date and end date in the Date field.
3. Set the following information:
Field Description
Test Select a test from the drop-down list box.
It includes routine tests, ISE analytes and calculation tests.
Sample Select a sample type from the drop-down list box.
Gender Select the patient gender from the drop-down list box.
Age Set the age range. Enter the low limit in the upper edit box and
select a unit in the following drop-down list box, then enter the
high limit in the lower edit box and select a unit in the following
drop-down list box.
Sample ID Enter the sequence number of desired sample.
4. Select Execute. The test measurements during the period are listed in the
Statistics list. Understand the following information in the Results area of the
page.
Field Description
Tests Number of tests that are finished and have results during the
period.
Mean Conc. Mean value of all the test results. Only the tests that are
finished and have results are counted.
SD Standard deviation of all test results.
Reference Default reference range of the test.
5. Select Refresh to update the graphic trend based on the configured conditions.

6. Select Print to print out the graphic trend and number of replicates of the test.
4.10.3 Workload
Select the Workload tab to enter the Workload page, where you can view the
workload statistics of a tester or sender during the specified period.
Figure4-58 Statistics Screen, Workload Page
Field Description
View Workload Select desired mode to view the workloads:
By Tester
By Sender
Date Select the date range you want to view the statistics of
workloads. The default is the current date.
Set start date in the first drop-down list box and end date in the
second one.
Please note that the start date must not be later than the end
date.
Tester Select a tester from the drop-down list box. It includes all
doctors that are configured on the Dictionary page.
The Tester field is visible only when By Tester is selected in
the View Workload area.
Sent From Select a department from which the sample is submitted. It
includes all departments other than clinical laboratory.
This field is blank by default, which means all doctors in
non-clinical laboratory departments.

Field Description
Sender Select a sender from the drop-down list box. It includes all
doctors that are configured on the Dictionary screen.
When this field is blank, it means all senders in the hospital.
Statistical In this field displays the summary of each column in the
Summary Statistics list above, except for the Department and Doctor
columns.
The following table introduces the buttons on the screen.
Button Function
Execute Click this button to search the workload statistics based on the
conditions.
Print Click this button to print the statistic data.
Refresh Click this button to refresh the statistic data.
4.10.4 Charges
Select the Charges tab to enter the Charges page, where you can view the total
costs and charges of each test during the specified period.
Figure4-59 Statistics Screen, Charges Page
Field Description
View Charges Select a mode you want to view the charge statistics. There
are two modes available:
By Patient

Field Description
By Test
Date Select the date range you want to view the charge statistics.
The default is the current date.
Set start date in the first drop-down list box and end date in the
second one.
Please note that the start date must not be later than the end
date.
Sample ID Set the sample range that you want to view the charge
statistics.
Test When viewing charges by test, select a test from the
drop-down list box next to Test.
Statistical In this field displays the summary of each column in the
Summary Statistics list above, except for these four columns: Patient,
MRN, Sample ID, Test, Cost and Price.
Button Function
Execute Click this button to search and refresh the charge statistics
during the specified period.
Print Click this button to print the statistic data.
Price Click this button to configure the cost and charge for each test.
Refer to Setting up Test Price in this section for details.
Setting up Test Price

1. Select Price on the Charges page. The Test Price Setup dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-60 Test Price Setup Dialog Box

2. Select a test from the test list.
3. Enter the cost and unit price for the test in the two edit boxes below the list.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set cost and price for other tests.
4.11 Parameters
Select Parameters from the function buttons area of the main screen. The
Parameters screen is displayed with Test page as the default view. You can set up
tests, carryover, profiles, calculation test, off-system test, STAT measurement and
ISE analyte.
The Parameters screen includes seven tabs:
Test
Carryover
Profile
Calculation
Off-system
STAT
ISE
The following sections introduce the Parameters screen by tab.
4.11.1 Test
On the Test page you can set up test parameters, reference ranges, calibration, QC,
serum index and result flag of routine test.
4.11.1.1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Test

1. Select the Test tab. The Basics window is displayed by default.
Figure4-61 Parameters Screen, Test Page, Basics

NOTE
Please set test parameters according to the package insert of
reagents. Incorrect settings may lead to unreliable test results.
2. Select Add to add new tests. The tests are listed in the left-hand list of the Test
page.
3. Select a test in the list and configure the following parameters:
Field Description
Test Enter the test name.
The name may consist of letters, numbers, _, +, -, * and /.
Full Name Enter the full name of test. This field can be left blank.
Std. No. Enter the general number of test for printout. This field can be
left blank.
R1 Enter the volume of first reagent. It ranges from 150µl to 350µl
with increment of 1.
NOTE
The total volume of R1, R2(as needed), R3(as
needed) and R4(as needed) must be within
150µl to 360µl.
R2 Enter the volume of second reagent. It ranges from 20µl to
350µl with increment of 1.
Enter 0 in this field for single-reagent analysis.
R3 Enter the volume of third reagent. It ranges from 20µl to 350µl.
Enter 0 in this field if third reagent is not needed.
R4 Enter the volume of fourth reagent. It ranges from 20µl to
350µl.
Enter 0 in this field if fourth reagent is not needed.
Sample Includes three fields: Standard, Diluted and Ratio.
Volume-Standa
Standard: Standard sample volume for test measuring. It
rd
ranges from 2µl to 45µl with increment of 0.1µl.
Diluted: Amount of sample to be used for dilution at the
specified ratio.
Ratio: Ratio used for diluting the specified amount of
standard sample.
Sample Includes three fields: Increased, Diluted and Ratio.
Volume-Increas
Increased: Amount of sample increased based on the
ed
standard volume. It ranges from 2µl to 45µl with increment
of 0.1µl.
Diluted: Amount of increased sample to be used for
dilution at the specified ratio.
increased sample.

Field Description
Sample Includes three fields: Decreased, Diluted and Ratio.
Volume-Decrea
Decreased: Amount of sample decreased based on the
sed
standard volume. It ranges from 2µl to 45µl with increment
of 0.1µl.
Diluted: Amount of decreased sample to be used for
dilution at the specified ratio.
decreased sample.
Reac. Type Select an analytical method from the drop-down list box. It
includes three types: Endpoint, Fixed-time and Kinetics.
Pri. Wave. Select primary wavelength used for the test.
It includes 12 wavelengths: 340, 380, 412, 450, 505, 546, 570,
605, 660, 700, 740 and 800.
The default is 340.
Sec. Wave. Select secondary wavelength used for the test. The default is
none.
Secondary wavelength is used to remove the disturbance and
must not be the same with the primary wavelength.
Direction Select a change direction of the absorbance during the
reaction process.
If the absorbance increases, select Increase; otherwise, select
Decrease.
Rgt. Blank Enter the measuring point range within which reagent blank is
measured. The unit is period by default. Each period is
equivalent to 9 seconds. For single-reagent tests, the reagent
blank time is within 0-12 or 14-80; for double-reagent tests, it is
within 14-42 or 43-80. The start time should be earlier than the
end time, with a difference no greater than 5.
This field is required for endpoint analysis other than Kinetics
and fixed-time.
Reagent Blank Period
NOTE
If you enter a reagent blank time during 14-80 or
43-80, it must not be intercrossed or overlapped
with the reaction time, or even greater than the
start point of the reaction period.

Field Description
Reac. Time Reaction time is measured in period by default, which is
equivalent to 9 seconds.
For Endpoint analysis, reaction time refers to the interval
between the start of the reaction and the end of the reaction.
For Kinetic or Fixed-time analysis, reaction time refers to the
interval between the point when the reaction becomes
stabilized and the point when the reaction is no longer
monitored.
Enter a reaction period during 14-80 for single-reagent tests or
during 43-80 for double-reagent tests. This setting is required
for all of the three analytical methods. The start reaction time
must not be greater than the end reaction time.
Pay attention to the following notes when setting up the
reaction time:
Endpoint analysis: The difference between the start and end
time must not be greater than 5. The number of measuring
points during this period should be equal to that of the reagent
blank period.
Fixed-time: The difference between the start and end time
must not be greater than 2.
Kinetic: The difference between the start and end time must
not be greater than 3.
When entering the reaction time in period, please refer to the
following reaction procedure.
R1 S R2 Reaction finished
P80
P1 P13 P43
1'52" 4'30" 5'42"
NOTE
P13 is the measuring point when the sample is not
stirred, and therefore must not be input on the
operating software.
Decimal Select the number of decimal places of test result.

Unit Select the result unit of the test. You can define more options
on the Dictionary page of the Setup screen.
Slope/Inter. Enter the slope and intercept in the two edit boxes. These two
fields are for compensation of test results.
When test result of a test is found to be shifted a little during
quality control, it can be compensated with the following
equation:
Y=a*X+b
Where,
X - Test result

Field Description
Y - Compensated result
a - Slope
b - Intercept
Absorbance Enter the absorbance range of first reagent following the
package insert of the reagent.
When reagent blank is out of this absorbance range, “RBK” will

be marked to the test results.
The absorbance range is from -30000 to 30000. 0 means no

absorbance check.
Incre. Test Enter the absorbance limit for increment test. The sample will
be increased and rerun when its absorbance is lower than this
limit.
The absorbance limit is from -30000 to 30000. 0 means no
absorbance check.
NOTE
The Incre. Test field does not apply to tests whose
increased sample volume is not configured.
Decre. Test Enter the absorbance limit for decrement test. The sample will
be decreased and rerun when its absorbance is greater than
this limit.
The absorbance limit is from -30000 to 30000. 0 means no
absorbance check.
NOTE
The Decre. Test field does not apply to tests
whose decreased sample volume is not
configured.
Lin. Range Enter the linearity range between test result and response
following the package insert of the reagent. 0 means no check.
Lin. Limit Enter the linearity limit. It applies to Kinetic only and ranges
from 0 to 1. For more information about linearity limit, see
8.1.3.4 Linearity Check.
0 means no check.
Subs. Limit Enter the minimum (decreased reaction) or maximum
(increased reaction) absorbance when the substrate is not
depleted within reaction time.
This field applies to Kinetic and fixed-time analysis only. It
ranges from 0 to 30000.

Field Description
Prozone Prozone check. It applies to Endpoint analysis only.
Prozone check can be conducted via rate check or further
addition of antigen.
Rate Rate check. It is available only when Prozone is selected.
You should set six factors (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, PC and ABS) for
rate check.
Antigen Antigen addition. It is available only when Prozone is selected.
When reaction is finished, you should add more antigens
(samples) and then check how the absorbance changes. No
change means antigen excess.
Q1 Enter measuring point Q1 for prozone check.
It is available only when Prozone is selected.
PC Enter the prozone limit.
ABS Enter the low absorbance limit for prozone check.
4. Select Save to save your configuration.
5. To delete a test, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to
delete the test.
4.11.1.2 Setting up Reference Range for Test

1. Select Reference on the Test page. The Reference window is displayed.

Figure4-62 Parameters Screen, Test Page, Reference
2. Select a test from the left-hand list of the Test page.
3. Set up reference ranges for the test as follows:
When you select… Then

By Default 1. Select patient gender and sample type from the
drop-down list boxes on the upper right corner of
the Reference window. A new range is created
and displayed in the middle list of the window.
2. Enter the low limit and high limit for the range in
the edit boxes next to Low and High.
By Diff. 1. Select patient gender and sample type from the
drop-down list boxes on the upper right corner of
the Reference window. A new range is created
and displayed in the middle list of the window.
2. Set the age range and select a unit from the
drop-down list box next to the range.
3. Enter the low limit and high limit for the range in
the edit boxes next to Low and High.
NOTE
When setting reference range by difference, two age ranges must not
contain or intersect with each other if the two reference ranges have
same test, patient gender and sample type.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set up reference ranges for other tests.

4.11.1.3 Calibration
1. Select Calibration on the Test page. The Calibration window is displayed.
Figure4-63 Parameters Screen, Test Page, Calibration
3. Enter the following information.
Field Description
Rule Select a calibration rule for the test. The test will be
calibrated with this calibration rule.
Replicates Select the number of times that each calibrator will be run
for the selected test.
The number of replicates should be within 1-5.
K Enter the K factor. The test will not be calibrated and the
result will be calculated with the equation: Y=K*X.
This field is available only when One-point Linear is
selected in the Rule field.
Sensitivity Enter the difference between the response of the strongest
and weakest calibrators. The system will alert the user
once the actual difference exceeds the limit.
The sensitivity is within 0-30000.
The system will not check the response difference when 0
or 30000 is entered or this field is left blank.
Factor Diff. Enter the difference between the calibration parameter K
(slope of calibration curve) of current and last calibrations.
It is available only when Multi-point Linear is selected in
the Rule field. The system will alert the user once the
actual difference exceeds the limit.
The default is void, which means no check.

Field Description
SD Enter the standard deviation of calibration curve.
It applies to multi-point linear and nonlinear calibrations
only.
It is within 0-999.
The default is 0, which means no check.
Blank Abs. Enter the absorbance range for the calibrators of 0
concentration.
The range is within 0-30000. The system will alert the user
once the range is exceeded.
Enter low limit in first edit box and high limit in second one.
The two edit boxes are void by default and the system will
not check the blank absorbance.
Make sure that the low limit are not greater than or equal to
the high limit.
Error Limit Enter the difference between maximum and minimum
response of each calibrator during repeated
measurements. It is within 0-30000. The system will alert
the user once the limit is exceeded.
The system will not check the error limit when 0 or 30000 is
entered or this field is left blank.
Corr. Coeff. Enter the correlation coefficient of calibration curve. It
applies to multi-point linear and nonlinear calibrations only.
The correlation coefficient is within 0-100(%).
0 means no check.
4. Select calibrators from the list on the right of the Calibration window. For more
information of setting up calibrators, refer to Setting up Calibrators in this section.
NOTE
The number of calibrators should be consistent with the calibration
rule.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for other tests.
Setting up Calibrators
1. Select Calibrator in the buttons area of the Calibration window. The Calibrator
Setup dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-64 Calibrator Setup Dialog Box
NOTE
In the Calibrators field includes 10 calibrators preset by the system.
No. 1 is always distilled water (WATER), which must not be changed or
deleted and is of 0 concentration for any test.
No.1-No.9 are CALIB1-CALIB9. You can change their concentration or
edit the basic information, but you’re not allowed to delete them.
You can add more calibrators, which allow you to delete or edit.
2. Select Add to add a new calibrator. The new calibrator is selected by default.
3. Set up the calibrator as follows:
Field Description
Calibrator Enter the name of calibrator. It must not be void or the
same with existing calibrator.
The name can consist of numbers and letters.
Lot No. Enter the lot No. of the calibrator.
Calibrators with same name should have different lot No.
for easy distinguishing.
The lot No. can consist of numbers and letters. It can be
left blank or repeated.
Exp. Date Set the expiration date of the calibrator. Expired calibrator
will not be used by the system.
Level Select the concentration level of calibrator. It includes
High, Med (Medium) and Low.
Position Select a sample disk from the Positions list and select a
position from the drop-down list box next to Position to
hold the calibrator.
4. Select a test from the drop-down list box next to Test.

5. Enter the concentration of the calibrator in the Concentration field.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to set up more calibrators.
8. To delete a calibrator, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK
to delete the calibrator.
9. Select Close to exit the Calibrator Setup dialog box.
4.11.1.4 QC
1. Select QC on the Test page. The QC window is displayed.
Figure4-65 Parameters Screen, Test Page, QC
3. In the Westgard Multi-rule area, select the check boxes next to desired
subrules.
4. In the Cum. Sum Check area, select the radio button next to desired range.
5. If you want to run quality control for the test automatically, enter the number of
samples between two adjacent QCs in the Interval field. The system will run QC
after the number of samples is analyzed.
6. Select controls from the list on the right of the QC window. For more information
of setting up controls, refer to Setting up Controls in this section.
Setting up Controls
1. Select Control in the buttons area of the QC window. The Control Setup dialog
box is displayed.

Figure4-66 Control Setup Dialog Box
NOTE
In the Controls field includes 5 controls (QUAL1-QUAL5) preset by
the system. You can edit their concentration, SD and basic
information, but you cannot delete these controls.
You can add more controls, which allow you to delete or edit.
2. Select Add to add a new control. The new control is selected by default.
3. Set up the control as follows:
Field Description
Control Enter the name of control. It must not be void or the same
with existing calibrator.
The name can consist of numbers and letters.
Lot No. Enter the lot No. of the control.
Controls with same name should have different lot No. for
easy distinguishing.
The lot No. can consist of numerics and letters. It can be
left blank or repeated.
Exp. Date Set the expiration date of the control. Expired control will
not be used by the system.
Level Select the concentration level of control. It includes High,
Med (Medium) and Low.
Position Select a sample disk from the Positions list and select a
position from the drop-down list box next to Position to
hold the control.
4. Select a test from the drop-down list box next to Test.
5. Enter the mean concentration of the control in the Mean Conc. field.

6. Enter the standard deviation of the control in the SD field.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 to set up more controls.
9. To delete a control, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK
to delete the control.
10. Select Close to exit the Control Setup dialog box.
4.11.1.5 Serum Index

Different reaction types may lead to high hemolysis, turbidity and icterus, and also
affect the test results due to reagents and its metabolite. Determination of degree of
turbidity, hemolysis and icterus in serum samples helps compensating the test
results.
1. Select Serum Index on the Test page. The Serum Index window is displayed.
Figure4-67 Parameters Screen, Test Page, Serum Index
3. Set up the following information:
Field Description
Reagen Select a reagent or distilled water used in serum index test.
t
Factors Enter the common parameters required for turbidity (L), hemolysis (H)
(A-F) and icterus (I).
Changes to any of the factors are valid for all serum indices.
Print Enter the print number for turbidity, hemolysis and icterus.
No.
Name Enter the print name for turbidity, hemolysis and icterus.

Field Description
Flag For the test result of serums that contains turbidity, hemolysis or
Results icterus, you can mark it with some flags that you define. Select the
check box next to Flag Result.
Only when this field is selected, the following flag and measurement
range can be set.
NOTE
If you do not want to display or print the qualitative flag
that you set for the test, deselect the Flag Result check
box.
No qualitative flag will be displayed or printed if you do
not set flag and measurement range after selecting the
Flag Result check box.
Flag Enter the result flags and corresponding measurement ranges. The
and system will add the flag to the test result that is less than or equal to
Range the corresponding measurement range.
For example: “Flag ‘-’ Range 10” means that all results less than or
equal to 10 will be marked with “-”. “Flag ‘+-’ Range 20” means that all
results between 10 and 20 will be marked with “+-”.
NOTE
You should enter both the measurement range and flag at
one time. Incomplete qualitative description cannot be
saved.
4. Select Save to save all information entered in the above step.
4.11.1.6 Qualitative Description

Measurement results of routine test can also be described with predefined flags as
the serum index stated in previous section.
1. Select Qual. Desc. on the Test page to enter the Qual. Desc. window.

Figure4-68 Parameters Screen, Test Page, Qual. Desc.
2. Select the check box next to Flag Result.
3. Set up result flags as follows:
Field Description
Flag Enter the result flags and corresponding measurement ranges. The
and system will add the flag to the test result that is less than or equal to the
Range corresponding measurement range.
For example: “Flag ‘-’ Range 10” means that all results less than or
equal to 10 will be marked with “-”. “Flag ‘+-’ Range 20” means that all
results between 10 and 20 will be marked with “+-”.
NOTE
You should enter both the measurement range and flag at
one time. Incomplete qualitative description cannot be
saved.
4. Select Save to save all information entered in the above step.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set up result flags for other tests.
4.11.2 Carryover
Carryover between adjacent reagents, though minimized by the cleaning procedure,
is still a factor to be taken into account. It may impose serious effect on certain
reagents and consequently on related test results. The analyzer provides a function
that enables you to minimize the effect by separating the tests whose reagents may
contaminate each other, and set wash procedures for reaction cuvettes and sample
probe to avoid carryover.
Select the Carryover tab to enter the Carryover page.

Figure4-69 Parameters Screen, Carryover Page
On the Carryover page you can check the carryover status of R1/R3 and R2/R4 and
rearrange the tests accordingly. Also you can set enhanced wash procedure for
reaction cuvettes.
Field Description
Solution Select a wash solution type to wash the reagent probe or sample
probe. It includes Distilled Water, Acid Wash Solution and
Alkaline Wash Solution.
If this field is left blank, it means the probe will not washed with
wash solution although the adjacent reagents may be
contaminated.
Volume Enter the wash solution volume as follows:
R1/R2 probe: 150-450µl;
Sample probe: 2-80µl;
Entering is forbidden when the Solution field is left blank.
4.11.2.1 Setting up Carryover between Adjacent Reagents

1. Select R1 Probe(R1/R3) on the Carryover page to enter the R1 Probe(R1/R3)
window.
The Contaminators list displays all first reagents currently configured, and the
Contaminated list displays all reagents for R1 probe except the selected one in
the Contaminators list.
2. Select a contaminator in the Contaminators list and select the contaminated

reagents in the Contaminated list.
3. Select a wash solution from the drop-down list box next to Solution to wash the
R1 probe.

4. Set the wash solution volume for R1 probe.
NOTE
If the Solution field is left blank and during analysis reagent
carryover cannot be solved by rearranging the tests, the R1 probe
will not be cleaned specially and just rinsed with deionized water.
If a wash solution type is selected, and during analysis reagent
carryover cannot be solved by rearranging the tests, the R1 probe
will be cleaned with specified amount of wash solution that is
configured.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to set carryover for R2 probe.
7. Select Cuvettes on the Carryover page to enter the following window. The
Contaminators list displays all reagents currently configured on the system. You
should set wash solution and proper volume of the probes to wash the reaction
cuvettes, which are often contaminated by certain reagents. The wash
procedure of cuvette is similar to a double-reagent test, during which R1 probe
wash solution, sample probe wash solution and R2 probe wash solution are
successively dispensed into the cuvette. When the cuvette is carried to the
washing position, it is cleaned again.
Figure4-70 Parameters Screen, Carryover Page, Cuvettes
8. Select a contaminating reagent in the Contaminators list.
9. Set the wash solution and volume of the probes for reaction cuvettes as needed.

NOTE
If the Solution field is left blank, during analysis the reaction
cuvettes will not be cleaned specially and just rinsed with
deionized water.
If a wash solution type is selected, during analysis the reaction
cuvettes will be cleaned with specified amount of wash solution
that is configured.
4.11.2.2 Setting up Test Order

In the Test Order list of the Carryover page shows all routine tests and the sequence
number. You can rearrange the tests to avoid carryover between reagents, the tests
will then be analyzed in the new order.
After you setting the new order, the system will adjust them slightly according to the
reagents.
Follow this procedure to set the test order:
1. Use the navigation buttons to move the tests to desired positions.
|<<: To first position;
<<: To previous position;
>>: To next position;
|>>: To last position
2. Select to save the new order. The system will run the tests according to the
order. Or select to restore previous settings.
4.11.3 Profile
Tests grouped together for certain clinical purposes (such as liver function, kidney
function, etc.) constitute a profile. User can request such tests quickly by simply
selecting a profile.
1. Select the Profile tab from the Parameters screen. The Profile page is
displayed.

Figure4-71 Parameters Screen, Profile Page
2. Select Add to add a new profile. The profile is displayed in the Profiles list and
highlighted by default.
3. Enter the name of profile in the edit box below Name.
4. Select desired routine tests, ISE analytes, off-system tests and calculation tests
from the test list in the middle of the page. Please note that you should first set
up off-system test and calculation test on the Off-system and Calculation
pages of the Parameters screen first.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more profiles.
7. To delete a profile, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to
delete the profile.
4.11.4 Calculation
The analyzer possesses a feature that can calculate different tests to derive new
tests of certain clinical purposes, such as A/G, TBil-DBil, etc.
Select the Calculation tab from the Parameters screen. The Calculation page is
displayed with Basics window as the default view.
4.11.4.1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Calculation Test

1. Select the Calculation from the Parameters screen. The Basics window of the
Calculation page is displayed.

Figure4-72 Parameters Screen, Calculation Page, Basics
2. Select Add to add a new calculation test. The test is displayed in the
Calculations list and highlighted by default.
3. Enter the following information for the new calculation test:
Field Description
Name Enter the name of the calculation test.
Std. No. Enter the general number of calculation test for printout. This field
can be left blank.
Unit Select the result unit of the calculation test. You can define more
Full Enter the full name of calculation test. It can be left blank.
4. To add some flags to the calculation test result, select the check box next to Flag
Result.
5. Enter a flag in the first edit box in left-column of the Result Setup area, and
enter the corresponding measurement range in the right box. The system will
mark the test result with the flag you entered once the result is less than or equal
to the range.
For example: “Flag ‘-’ Range 10” means that all results less than or equal to 10
will be marked with “-”. “Flag ‘+-’ Range 20” means that all results between 10
and 20 will be marked with “+-”.

NOTE
You should enter both the measurement range and flag at one time.
Incomplete qualitative description cannot be saved.
If you do not want to display or print the qualitative flag that you set for
the test, deselect the Flag Result check box.
6. To edit the formula of calculation test, use the keypad and tests in the lower right
corner of the Basics window.
7. Select desired tests from the Tests list and combine them with the operators on
the keypad. For example: Select TBIL from the test list and select SEL to add it
to the formula, select + from the keypad, select ALB from the test list and select
SEL to add it to the formula. The formula TBIL+ALB is produced.
8. To delete the prior character in the formula, select BS. Select AC to clear the
formula in the Formula area.
9. Select Save to save the configuration and formula for the calculation test.
10. Repeat steps 2 through 9 to set up more calculation tests.
11. To delete a calculation test, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up.
Select OK to delete the test.
4.11.4.2 Setting up Reference Range for Calculation Test

Reference ranges for calculation test can be configured in the same way as routine
test. Refer to 4.11.1.2 Setting up Reference Range for Test for details.
4.11.5 Off-system
Off-system tests are the ones that cannot be run on the system but you want to print
out the result on patient reports via the system separately or together with the tests
analyzed on the system. You can enter the off-system test results into the system
and print out them as needed.
There are two types of off-system test: qualitative and quantitative.
Qualitative tests: No numeric results are obtained but the flags you defined on
the system.
Quantitative tests: Numeric results and defined flags are displayed and printed.
Select the Off-system tab from the Parameters screen. The Off-system page is
displayed with Basics window as the default view.
4.11.5.1 Configuring Basic Parameters for Off-system Test

1. Select the Off-system tab from the Parameters screen. The Basics window of
the Off-system page is displayed.

Figure4-73 Parameters Screen, Off-system Page, Basics
2. Select Add to add a new off-system test. The test is displayed in the Off-system
list and highlighted by default.
3. Enter the following information for the new off-system test:
Field Description
Name Enter the name of the off-system test.
Std. No. Enter the general number of off-system test for printout. This field
can be left blank.
Unit Select the result unit of the off-system test. You can define more
Full Enter the full name of off-system test. It can be left blank.
4. To add some flags to the off-system test result, select the check box next to Flag
Result.
to the range.

NOTE
6. Select the property of the off-system test from the drop-down list box next to
Result Type.
7. If Qualitative is selected from the Result Type field, select a default value from
the Default field below Result Type.
8. Select Save to save the configuration for the off-system test.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 to set up more off-system tests.
10. To delete an off-system test, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up.
Select OK to delete the test.
4.11.5.2 Setting up Reference Range for Off-system Test

Reference ranges for off-system test can be configured in the same way as routine
test. Refer to 4.11.1.2 Setting up Reference Range for Test for details.
4.11.6 STAT
Before ordering emergent samples, you must follow these steps to perform the STAT
configuration:
1. Select the STAT tab from the Parameters screen. The STAT page is displayed.
Figure4-74 Parameters Screen, STAT Page
2. Select the check boxes next to desired fields in the Visible Parameters area.

The selected parameters will be displayed on the Request Emergent Samples
dialog box.
3. Select the check boxes next to desired field in the Read-only Parameters area
and select default value from the drop-down list box. The selected fields will be
displayed read-only on the Request Emergent Samples dialog box with the
specified value as default.
4. Select desired routine tests, ISE analytes, off-system tests and profiles from the
test list on the STAT page. The selected tests will be analyzed for emergent
samples.
5. Select Save to save the configuration.
4.11.7 ISE
Select the ISE tab from the Parameters screen. The ISE page is displayed with
Basics window as the default view.
The ISE page is divided into three windows:
Basics
Reference
QC
The following sections introduce the page in detail.
4.11.7.1 Configuring Basic Parameters for ISE Analyte

1. Select the ISE tab from the Parameters screen. The Basics window is
displayed by default.
Figure4-75 Parameters Screen, ISE Page, Basics
2. Select a test from the Analytes list on the left column of the ISE page.

3. Enter the following information for the ISE analyte:
Field Description
Std. No. Enter the general number of ISE Analyte for printout. This field
can be left blank.
Full Name Enter the full name of ISE analyte. It can be left blank.
4. Select a sample type by clicking the radio button next to desired option in the
Sample Type area.
5. To add some flags to the ISE test result, select the check box next to Flag
Result.
to the range.
NOTE
7. Select Save to save the configuration for the ISE analyte.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 to set up other ISE analytes.
4.11.7.2 Setting up Reference Range for ISE Analyte

Reference ranges for ISE analyte can be configured in the same way as routine test.
Refer to 4.11.1.2 Setting up Reference Range for Test for details.
4.11.7.3 Setting up QC for ISE Analyte

Quality control for ISE Analyte can be configured in the same way as routine test.
Refer to 4.11.1.4 QC for details.
4.12 Setup
Select Setup from the function buttons area of the main screen, the Setup screen is
displayed with System as the default page. You can configure the system parameters,
data dictionary, hospital information (department and doctor), user information,
printing, bar code, LIS communication and ISE.
The Setup screen includes seven tabs:
System
Dictionary
Hospital

User
Print
Bar Code
LIS
ISE
The following sections introduce the screen by tab.
4.12.1 System
1. Select Setup from the main screen. The System page is displayed by default.
Figure4-76 Setup Screen, System Page
2. Configure the following settings:
Field Description
R. Warning Count Set the number of tests remaining in the reagent bottle at
which the system notifies you the supply is low.
The limit should be within 0-20. 0 means that remaining
reagent will not be checked during measurement.
NOTE
Please set the reagent alarm limit correctly, so
that you will be reminded when more reagents
are needed.
Enhan. After Test When this option is selected, the system will wash the
sample probe with acid or alkaline wash solution or water
after sampling for a batch of tests is finished.

Field Description
Temperature be When this option is selected, the system will start analyzing
Steady only after the reaction disk temperature gets steady.
It will take about 20 minutes for the reaction disk temperature
to get steady.
NOTE
Unselecting the Temperature be Steady check
box may cause inaccurate test results.
Before measuring samples, the system will
check the reaction disk temperature and alert
the user if the temperature is not steady.
Light Source be When this option is selected, the system will start analyzing
Steady only after the light source gets steady.
It will take about 15 minutes for the light source to get steady.
NOTE
Unselecting the Light Source be Steady check
box may cause inaccurate test results.
Alarm Volume Adjust the alarm volume by moving the slider left and right.
NOTE
This field is valid only for the computer that is
equipped with an audio card.
The computer that has no audio card will alarm
via the buzzer.
Above Reference Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
High that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when the test result exceeds the reference high limit.
Void means this item will not be checked.
Below Reference Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
Low that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when the test result is lower than the reference low limit.
Above Linearity Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
High that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when the test result exceeds the linearity high limit.
Below Linearity Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
Low that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when the test result is lower than the linearity low limit.

Field Description
No Linear Interval Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when the number of measuring points within substrate limit is
less than or equal to 3.
This field is available for Kinetic reaction only.
No Calculation Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. If the
Interval number of measuring points within linearity range is less than
2 during high-activity enzyme measurement, the linearity
range will be expanded. If the number of measuring points is
less than 2 even when the lag time is included, the system
will rerun the tests with the selected mode.
This field is available for Kinetic reaction only.
Nonlinear Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. If the
calculated linearity is greater than the linearity limit that is
configured on Basics window of the Test page, the system
will rerun the tests with the selected mode.
Substrate Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
Depleted that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when substrate is depleted during reaction process.
This field is available for fixed-time reaction only.
Beyond Prozone Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
Limit that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when prozone occurs during reaction process.
This field is available for Endpoint reaction only.
Above Strongest Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
Calib. that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when the response exceeds that of the
highest-concentration calibrator.
Below Zero Calib. Select a rerun mode from the drop-down list box. It means
that the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode
when the response is lower than that of the
zero-concentration calibrator.
Started Up When this option is selected, the system will remind you to
run new calibration on the Tips page of the Status screen.
New Bottle When this option is selected, the system will remind you to

Field Description
Para. Changed When this option is selected, the system will remind you to
run new calibration on the Tips page of the Status screen
when test parameters are changed, such as test name,
primary wavelength, secondary wavelength, reaction time,
reagent volume, standard sample volume, reaction type,
reaction direction, etc.
Lot Changed When this option is selected, the system will remind you to
Before Testing When this option is selected, the system will run new
calibration automatically before analyzing the test for each
sample no matter if the test has been calibrated or not.
Interval(Hour) Enter the number of samples between two adjacent
calibrations.
The interval should be within 0-9999. 0 means that the
interval is not applied.
Turn Off Light When this option is selected, the light source will be turned
Source off during system sleeping.
Switch Off Reac. When this option is selected, the reaction temperature
Temp. Control control will be turned off during system sleeping.
Switch Off When this option is selected, the preheat temperature control
Preheat Temp. will be turned off during system sleeping.
Control
Request Sample When this option is selected, new samples will be requested
with Defaults with the default settings on the Sample Request screen.
Request Sample When this option is selected, if the newly-scanned samples
with Scanned have no corresponding program information, they will be
Information requested automatically using the default settings on the
Sample Request screen.
If you select this option for sample request, “Extract Sample
Information” on the Bar Code tab will be ignored.
Count Reaction When this option is selected, the reaction time and reagent
Time in Period blank time on the Basics window of the Test page will be
measured by period.
Unselection means the reaction time and reagent blank time
are measured by second.
Compensate Select this option. When a test is run with result calculated,
Results after Test the test result will be recalculated automatically based on the
configured compensation factors.
3. Select Save to save the configuration performed in previous step.

4. If you want to recover factory default settings of all options, select Restore.
4.12.2 Dictionary
1. Select the Dictionary tab from the Setup screen, the Dictionary page is
displayed.

Figure4-77 Setup Screen, Dictionary Page
NOTE
Some data pieces have already been given by the system and cannot
be deleted by user.
2. There are multiple data groups in the left column of the Dictionary page. Select
the radio button next to desired data group. The preset data pieces for the group
are displayed in the data list.
3. Define new elements for the data group as follows:

Unit 1. Select Add to add new elements for the data group.
2. Enter the name of element in the first edit box below
the data list.
3. Set a mnemonic for the new element. Once the
mnemonic is entered, the system will identify it as the
element.
4. Enter the comments for the element.
Sample Type 1. Select Add to add new elements for the data group.
the data list.
element.
5. Select the default sample type from the drop-down list
box next to Default Type.

Characteristic
Blood Type
1. Select Add to add new elements for the data group.
Patient Type
Pay Type the data list.
Qualitative Result 3. Set a mnemonic for the new element. Once the
Result Flag
element.
Diagnosis 4. Enter the comments for the element.
Race
Default Type
5. To delete a user-defined element, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops
up. Select OK to delete the element.
4.12.3 Hospital
1. Select the Hospital tab from the Setup screen. The Hospital page is displayed.
Figure4-78 Setup Screen, Hospital Page
NOTE
Some data pieces have already been given by the system and cannot
be deleted by user.

2. There are multiple data groups in the left column of the Hospital page. Select
the radio button next to desired data group. The preset data pieces for the group
are displayed in the right-hand list.
3. Define new elements for the data group as follows:

Hospital Enter the following information:
Hospital name
Address of the hospital
Postal code
Telephone number
Patient Zone 1. Select Add to add new elements for the data group.
Department 2. Enter the name of element in the first edit box below
the data list.
element.
Doctor 1. Select Add to add new elements for the data group.
2. Enter the name of doctor in the first edit box below the
data list.
3. Set a mnemonic for the new doctor. Once the
doctor.
4. Select a department from the drop-down list box to
which the doctors belongs.
5. To delete a user-defined element, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops
up. Select OK to delete the element.
4.12.4 User
NOTE
The User page can only be operated by users of administrator group.
1. Select the User tab from the Setup screen to navigate to the User page. An
ADMIN user is preset by the system and possesses permissions to access all
operations for user management and has the authority to add new users.

Figure4-79 Setup Screen, User Page
2. Select Add to add a user. The user is displayed in the Users list and highlighted
by default.
Field Description
Username Enter the user name.
Password Enter the user password.
Confirm Enter the confirm password. This password must be the same with
the above one.
Doctor Select a doctor who is associated with the user.
Description Enter detailed information about the user.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add more users.
6. To delete a user except for the preset ADMIN, select Delete. The Confirm dialog
box pops up. Select OK to delete the user.
7. Select Print to print out all user information. The Print button is available for
Administrator user only.
8. To set up user groups, refer to Setting up User Group in this section for details.

NOTE
”Admin” is the default administrator of the system. It must not be
deleted or renamed.
Only the Admin user can add or change authorities of other users
or operate the users.
When you log on the system with other user rather than Admin,
only the current user and associated doctor are displayed on the
Users page. You can only change the name, password, doctor
and detailed information of current user.
It is recommended that all users have unique password.
Setting up User Group

Follow this procedure to set up user group and authorities:
1. Select User Group from the bottom area of the User page. The User Group
Setup dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-80 User Group Setup Dialog Box
2. Select Add to add a new user group. The user is displayed in the left-hand
column of the User Group Setup dialog box and highlighted by default.
3. Enter the name and detailed information about the group.
4. Select the check boxes next to desired authorities in the authority list. The users
of the group will be entitled to perform the operations of selected options.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to set up more user groups.
7. To delete a user group, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select
OK to delete the user group.
8. Select Close to exit the User Group Setup dialog box.

4.12.5 Print
1. Select the Print tab from the Setup screen. The Print page is displayed. All
reports on the analyzer are listed in the left column of the Print page.
NOTE
If no printer is connected to the operation unit(computer), the Print
button on all screens will be disabled.
Figure4-81 Setup Screen, Print Page
2. Select a report type from the Reports list. The preset templates of the report
are displayed in the Templates list. Each report has one default template,
which is indicated by Y in the Default column.
Report Description Templates

Test report of single patient. It Short Report (Non-stylus)
includes patient information,
Long Report (Non-stylus)
Patient Report sample information, test results
and diagnosis. Long Report (Stylus)
Double Report
Results of a test during a Test Report (Non-stylus)
Test Report period. It includes test
information and test results.
Report Summary of reports, which Report Collection
Collection includes all samples. (Non-stylus)
Summary of reagents. It Reagent Statistics-1
Reagent includes reagent inventory, (Non-stylus)
Statistics remaining tests, dispensed
Reagent Statistics-2
volume, etc
(Non-stylus)

Reagent Blank Reagent blank results of tests. Reagent Blank Data
Data (Non-stylus)
Reagent Blank Reagent blank reaction curve Reagent Blank Reaction
Reaction Curve of tests. Curve (Non-stylus)
Reaction curve of a calibration Detailed Calibration Reaction
Calibration
run. It includes curve and curve Curve (Non-stylus)
Reaction Curve
data.
Calibration curve of a Detailed Calibration Curve
successful calibration run of a (Non-stylus)
Calibration
test. It includes calibration
Curve
curve, process data and
parameters.
Calibration It includes calibration rules, Calibration Parameters
Parameters parameters of all tests. (Non-stylus)
Calibration It includes the calibration data Calibration Data (Non-stylus)
Data of multiple calibrators for a test.
Real-time QC graph and QC Real-time QC (Non-stylus)
Real-time QC
data.
QC Reaction Reaction curve of a QC run. It QC Reaction Curve
Curve includes curve and curve data. (Non-stylus)
Daily QC graph and QC data. Detailed Daily QC
Daily QC
(Non-stylus)
Day-to-day QC graph and QC Detailed Day-to-Day QC
Day-to-Day QC
data. (Non-stylus)
ISE calibration trend curve and ISE Calibration Data
ISE Calibration
data. (Non-stylus)
It includes number of sample Sample Statistics
Sample requests, number of tests, (Non-stylus)
Statistics measurement information and
sample information, etc.
It includes the measurements Measurement Statistics
Test Statistics and reagent volume of all tests (Non-stylus)
during a period.
Result trend curve of a test Detailed Test Result
Test Result
during a period. It includes the Statistics (Non-stylus)
Statistics
trend curve and data.
Tester Workload of testers. It includes Tester Workload (Non-stylus)
Workload number of samples and tests.
Sender Workload of senders. Sender Workload
Workload (Non-stylus)
Charge It includes the expenses of Charge Statistics
Statistics patients and total profits. (Non-stylus)
It includes the cost, charge and Cost Statistics (Non-stylus)
Cost Statistics profits of all tests during a
period.
User Information of all users. User Information
Information (Non-stylus)

Error information during a Error Logs (Non-stylus)
Error Logs
period.
Reaction curve of a routine Detailed Normal Reaction
Normal
test. It includes curve and Curve (Non-stylus)
Reaction Curve
curve data.
3. Select a template in the Templates list, the detailed information about the
template are shown in the Properties area below the Templates list.
4. To print out test results automatically when a sample is analyzed, select the
check box next to Print after Sample Run. If you want to print test results only
after reviewing them, select the check box next to Print after Reviewal.
5. Select a printer type from the drop-down list box to the right of Printer Type.
6. Select the default printer in the Default field.
7. Select Save to save the settings performed in above steps.
8. To delete a template of a report, select Delete. Select OK on the popup
Confirm dialog box to delete the template.
9. To create or edit a template, select Edit from the bottom column of the Print
page. The MakePrintTemplate screen is displayed. You can edit the report
templates as needed. Refer to Appendix B Template Modifying Software for
details.
10. After creating or deleting a template on the MakePrintTemplate screen, select
Load from the bottom column of the Print page. The Reports and Templates
lists on the Print page are updated.
11. In the Tests list on the right column of the Print page, you can rearrange the
test order so that the tests are printed on reports as you configured.
12. Use the navigation buttons to rearrange the tests:
Button Function
|<< Click this button to move selected test to the first position.
<< Click this button to move selected test to the previous position.
>> Click this button to move selected test to the next position.
>>| Click this button to move selected test to the last position.
13. Select to save the settings or select to cancel.
4.12.6 Bar Code
NOTE
The Bar Code tab of the Setup screen will be invisible if your analyzer
is not configured with the sample or reagent bar code reader.

1. Select the Bar Code tab from the Setup screen to navigate to the Bar Code page.
Figure4-82 Setup Screen, Bar Code Page
NOTE
During initialization, the system checks if a sample or reagent bar code
reader is equipped. If not, the related options on the Bar Code page
for the reader are disabled.
2. When a sample bar code reader is equipped, select the check box next to Sample
Barcode to enable the sample bar code reader. All buttons associated with
sample bar code reader are activated.
3. When the check box next to Extract Sample Information is selected, the system
will analyze sample information based on the scanned bar code rather than
download it from the LIS host.
For instance, if sample ID and measuring date are set in the Format area, the
system will analyze the bar code and fill the obtained sample ID and date into
sample information.
NOTE
Extract Sample Information is available only when the system is
disconnected from the LIS host.
4. Set up the sample bar code information as follows:

NOTE
You can set each segment in a bar code to 0, but please ensure that
the total length of sample bar code is within 3-27 digits and each bar
code is unique.
The sample bar code that is scanned by the reader or entered
manually must comply with the bar code rule of the analyzer; otherwise
the system will regard it as erroneous code and leave alone the
corresponding sample during analysis.
The bar code length for ITF must be an even number.
The check digit is not counted in the entire bar code and does not need
to be entered manually.
Field Description
Total Total length of the sample bar code. It should be within 3-27 digits.
S. Priority Routine or STAT. It should 0 or 1 digit.
Test D/T Date (YY-MM-DD) when sample is analyzed. It should be 0 or 6
digits.
Sample ID Sample No. It should be 0, 3 or 4 digits.
Sample Type of sample (serum, plasma, urine, etc). It should be 0 or 1
Type digit.
Profile No. Sequence number of profile. It should be 0, 2 or 3 digits.
5. Select the check boxes next to desired symbologies in the Sample Bar Code
area.
6. Select the check boxes next to corresponding Check fields as needed.
7. Select Save to save the settings. Or select Restore to restore factory default
settings of all sample bar code options.
8. If a reagent bar code reader is equipped, the check box next to Reagent Barcode
is selected by default. Reagents on reagent disk will be located and identified by
reagent bar code reader.
9. Set up the reagent bar code information as follows:
NOTE
Total length of each reagent bar code should be within 15-30 digits with
all elements available. Each reagent bar code should be unique.
Check each element of the scanned reagent bar code. It’s OK that any
of test No. and test name is entered each time. The test No. or test
name you entered must be consistent with that on the software;
otherwise the system will regard it as erroneous code and invalidate
the corresponding reagent.
The bar code length for ITF must be an even number.
The check digit is not counted in the entire bar code and does not need
to be entered manually.

Field Description
Total Total length of the reagent bar code. It should be within 15-30 digits.
Test No. No. of test. It should be 0, or 2 to 4 digits.
Test Name Name of test. It should be 0 to 10 digits.
Rgt. Type Type of reagent (R1, R2, R3, R4). It should be 1 digit.
Bottle No. No. of reagent bottle. It should be 3 to 5 digits.
Size Type of reagent bottle (Outer Circle 20ml, Outer Circle 40ml, Inner
Circle 40ml, Inner Circle 62ml). It should be 1 to 3 digits.
Lot No. Lot No. of reagent. It should be 3 to 5 digits.
Exp. Date Expiration date (YY-MM or YY-MM-DD) of reagent. It should be 4, 6
or 8 digits.
10. Select the check boxes next to desired symbologies in the Reagent Bar Code
area.
11. Select the check boxes next to corresponding Check fields as needed.
12. Select Save to save the settings. Or select Restore to restore factory default
settings of all reagent bar code options.
4.12.7 LIS
If the system is to be connected to the LIS host, follow this procedure to set up LIS
communication:
1. Select the LIS tab from the Setup screen to navigate to the LIS page.
Figure4-83 Setup Screen, LIS Page

2. Configure the following options:
Field Description
LIS Host IP Enter the IP address of LIS host to which the analyzer will
be connected.
Port Enter the communication port of the LIS host.
Mode Select a mode that the LIS host is connected to the system.
There are two modes available:
Unidire.(Unidirectional): The system sends test result
and other information to the LIS host.
Bidire.(Bidirectional): The system not only sends test
result and other information to LIS, but also downloads
sample request information from LIS.
Send Results after When this option is selected, the system will send test
Each Sample Run results to LIS when each sample is analyzed.
Download Sample When this option is selected, the analyzer will download
Information after sample information from LIS when a sample is scanned.
Scan
This filed is available only when Bidire. is selected in the
Mode area.
Connect to LIS When this option is selected, at system startup the system
When Started Up will connect to LIS according to the IP address and
communication port you entered.
Response Timeout Enter the time limit for LIS host to response to downloading
sample information, receiving test results and connecting.
It should be within 1-200s.
If Samples Exist While downloading sample information, if a sample with
same name exists, you can:
Ignore: The original sample remains and the newly
downloaded sample is neglected;
Add: The requested tests in original sample remain, and
the tests of the new sample are added to the original one.
Overwrite: No matter if original sample is finished or not, it
is deleted and replaced by the new sample.
3. In the Test Correspondence list on right column of the LIS page, all tests on the
system are listed with test No. and corresponding No. on the LIS host. Test
name and No. on LIS may be different from that on the analyzer. In order to
ensure samples are downloaded correctly from LIS and test results are
transmitted correctly to the LIS host, you should relate the tests on LIS and the
analyzer using correspondence code.
Select a test in the Test Correspondence list, a cursor appears in the Code on LIS
column of the test.
4. Delete the original number and enter the new number. The test is represented by
the new number on the LIS host.
6. Select Connect. The system is connected to the LIS host.

7. If you want to cut the connection between the system and the LIS host, select
Disconnect.
4.12.8 ISE
NOTE
The ISE tab of the Setup screen will be invisible if your analyzer is not
configured with the ISE module.
If your analyzer is equipped with the ISE module, you can set up the system to clean
the ISE module automatically or to calibrate the electrodes and peristaltic pumps at
specified time.
1. Select the ISE tab from the Setup screen to navigate to the ISE page.
Figure 4-84 Setup Screen, ISE Page
2. Select any of the following options if needed.
When you select … Then …

Perform Cleaning When The system will clean the ISE electrodes
Started up automatically every time when started up.
Perform Cleaning When The system will clean the ISE electrodes
Shut down automatically every time when shut down.
Perform Cleaning after 50 The system will clean the ISE electrodes
Sample Runs automatically after 50 samples are analyzed.
CAUTION
After selecting this option, you must
place ISE cleaning solution on position
D1 of the sample disk; otherwise,
cleaning will not be performed.

When you select … Then …
Request Calibration in Calibration will be requested automatically for
Every (hours) each electrode in specified hours.
You should enter a number (hours) in the edit box
below this option, The interval should be within 1-8
hours.
Calibrate ISE Pumps When The peristaltic pumps will be calibrated
Started up automatically every time when started up.
Calibrate ISE Pumps When The peristaltic pumps will be calibrated
Shut down automatically every time when shut down.
4.13 Utilities
Select Utilities from the function buttons area of the main screen. The Utilities
screen is displayed with Daily Maint. tab as the default view and allows you to check
component status, view event logs and maintain the system.
The Utilities screen includes five tabs:
Daily Maint.
Working Hours
Logs
Alignment
ISE
The following sections introduce the Utilities screen by tab.
NOTE
The ISE tab will be invisible if no ISE module is equipped.
4.13.1 Daily Maintenance

1. Select Utilities from the main screen. The Daily Maint. page is displayed by
default.

Figure4-85 Utilities Screen, Daily Maint. Page
2. Check the following status on the Daily Maint. page.

Field Description
System It displays the reaction disk temperature and wash solution
Status preheat temperature.
Unit Status It displays the status of each unit of the system.
Floater It shows the status of each floater of the system. If you want to
Status view the latest status of each floater, select Floater Query in the
Maintenance list, and then click Execute. Floater Status list is
Pump Status It shows the status of each pump.
3. In the Maintenance list on left column of the Daily Maint. page lists multiple
maintenance operations. Select an operation item and select Execute. The
Confirm dialog box pops up.
4. Select OK to perform the maintenance.
Executing Maintenance Instruction

The Daily Maint. page provides you with multiple maintenance instructions, which
are used to maintain the system in necessary conditions. Execute the instructions as
instructed in the table below.
Maintenance Description Operating Procedures

Instruction
Startup When failure occurs 1. Select Startup Initialization,
Initialization during startup initialization, and then select Execute. The
you can re-perform the Confirm dialog box pops up.
initialization manually,
2. Select OK to initialize the system
letting the system work in
again.
normal status.

System Reset When abnormity occurs to 1. Select System Reset, and then
the system, you can reset select Execute. The Confirm
the system manually. dialog box pops up.
2. Select OK to start resetting the
system.
Cuvette/Lamp The cleanness of reaction 1. Select Cuvette/Lamp Check,
Check cuvettes and the light and then select Execute. The
intensity directly affect the Confirm dialog box pops up.
measured absorbance.
2. Select OK to pop up the
Therefore, you should
Cuvette/Lamp Check dialog box.
check the cuvettes and
Select an option between Cuvette
lamp on a weekly basis to
and Lamp. The system starts
ensure that the cuvettes
checking the cuvettes or lamp.
are clear, and the lamp
goes properly rather than 3. Click Save to save the water
being weakened below the blank absorbance for the reaction
cutoff value (or the fiber cuvettes. Select Close to close the
bundle is not broken and Cuvette/Lamp Check dialog box.
has normal permeance).
Replace the cuvette and
lamp if necessary.
Concentrated When an alarm occurs 1. Select Concentrated Wash
Wash Solution during measurement Solution Refilling, and then select
Refilling indicating not enough Execute. The Confirm dialog box
concentrated wash pops up.
solution, you should refill it
2. Select OK. The system releases
immediately. Besides, you
the pressure in wash solution tank.
can refill concentrated
Then the Refill Concentrated
wash solution when the
Wash Solution dialog box is
system is idle(no alarm is
displayed.
triggered indicating
insufficient wash solution), 3. Refill enough wash solution and
so that enough wash select OK. The refilling operation is
solution is ensured during finished.
measurement.
System Prime Prime Water 1. Select System Prime, and then
Tank/Probes/Mixers: select Execute. The Confirm
When the liquid level of dialog box pops up.
the water tank is too low
2. Select OK. The System Prime
and air exists in the tubing
dialog box pops up.
for washing exteriors of
probes/mixers, select this 3. Select desired option and select
option to prime the water OK. The system starts the priming
tank and probes/mixers, operation.
thus preventing wash
solution from overflowing
from the wash wells in
case of high pressure.
Prime Wash Solution
Tank: When an alarm
occurs indicating
insufficient diluted wash
solution, you can select
this option to prime dilution
tank, thus canceling the
alarm.
Prime Wash Unit: When

the tubing of the wash unit
is void or experiences
large mount of air bubbles,
you can select this option
to prime the tubing with
wash solution and
deionized water, thus
preventing the wash
probes from dripping
during analysis.
Cuvette When the reaction 1. Select Cuvette Cleaning and
Cleaning cuvettes have been used then select Execute. The Confirm
for a long time, you should dialog box pops up.
clean them with wash
2. Select OK. The Cuvette
solution and test the
Cleaning dialog box pops up.
cuvette blank to determine
if the cuvettes are clear 3. Select desired option and select
enough. OK. The system starts the cleaning
operation. If the wash solution is
insufficient, the system will remind
you that cleaning cannot be
performed.
Wash Unit When the wash unit has 1. Select Wash Unit Maintenance,
Maintenance been used for a long time, and then select Execute. The
you should clean maintain Confirm dialog box pops up.
it by cleaning the wash
2. Select OK. The Maintain Wash
probes.
Unit dialog box is displayed. Check
if the wash probes are aligned to
the reaction cuvettes, and then
select OK. The system starts
cleaning the wash probes.
Floater Query You can use this function 1. Select Floater Query, and then
to inquire the working select Execute. The Confirm
status of each floater. dialog box pops up.
2. Select OK. The system inquires
the floater status and then
refreshes the contents in the
Floater Status list.
Failure The system enters the 1. Select Failure Recovery, and
Recovery Failure status when then select Execute. The Confirm
suffering errors. After dialog box pops up.
handling the errors with
2. Select OK. The system recovers
the power switched on,
and then enters the Idle status.
you must recover the
system by executing
failure recovery or startup
initialization.
4.13.2 Working Hours

1. Select the Working Hours tab from the Utilities screen. The Working hours
page is displayed.

Figure4-86 Utilities Screen, Working Hours Page
2. Check the status of system components by understanding the following

information:
Field Description
Component Name of system component, such as sample probe, mixer, lamp,
etc.
Rated Number of hours that the manufacturer announces the component
Hours can work for. The component should be replaced or serviced once
the actual time exceeds this rated time.
Maint Number of times that the component has been serviced and
Times replaced.
Last Maint. Date when the component was recently serviced.
Working Number of hours that the component works for from the time when
Hours it was recently replaced or serviced.
Status Status of the component.
3. See the Status column of the components, and replace the component if
needed.
4. After replacing, select Repair on the Working Hours page. The maintenance
times increase by 1 and the working hour is zeroed.
NOTE
The Repair button can be used only by our service personnel or those
authorized by us.
4.13.3 Logs
1. Select the Logs tab from the Utilities screen to enter the Logs page. The error

logs in recent one month are recorded the log list and the logs before the month
are automatically saved in the error files.
Figure4-87 Utilities Screen, Logs Page
2. Select an error from the log list, the Error Information area on right column of
the Logs page shows the error description, probable causes, corrective action
and influenced tests of the error.
3. Select Refresh to update the log list.
4. To delete an error log, select Delete. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select
OK to delete the error log.
5. To print the error logs currently displayed in the log list, select Print.
6. In the log list may include a lot of error logs, you can Use the Filter function to
view desired error logs.
7. Select Filter. The Filter Errors dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-88 Filter Errors Dialog Box

8. Set the following conditions:
Field Description
Date Select the start date and end date in the same month.
If start date is blank, it means all logs that occur earlier than the
end date.
If end date is blank, it means all logs that occur later than the
start date.
If both boxes are blank, it means all logs that occur in the
current month.
NOTE
The end day for each month is as follows:
28th for February of non-leap year;
29th for February of leap year;
30th for lunar month;
31st for solar month.
Error Enter the error code of desired log. If no code is entered, it means
Code all logs.
Level Select an error level from the drop-down list box.
Failed Part Select a failed part from the drop-down list box.
9. Select OK. The Log List on the Logs page refreshes and displays the logs
meeting the conditions you entered.
4.13.4 Alignment
Select the Alignment tab from the Utilities screen. The Alignment page is
displayed.
4.13.4.1 Optional
NOTE
The Alignment page is just accessible to the ADMIN user, who can
only fill in the serial number of the analyzer and delete reaction curves
during a period on the Optional window.
Module configuration and version select can be performed only by
Debug users.
1. Select Optional on the Alignment page. The Optional window is displayed as

follows.

Figure4-89 Utilities Screen, Alignment Page, Optional
2. Enter the serial number of the system in the only edit box on the Optional window.
3. Select Save to save the configuration.
4. To delete the reaction curve during a period, select Delete Curve. The Delete
Reaction Curve dialog box is displayed.
Figure4-90 Delete Reaction Curve Dialog Box
5. Set the date range and select OK on the Delete Reaction Curve dialog box. The
reaction curve data during the specified period are deleted.
4.13.5 ISE
Select the ISE tab from the Utilities screen. The ISE page is displayed.

Figure4-91 Utilities Screen, ISE Page
Replacing ISE Component

1. Check the status of ISE components by understanding the following information:
Field Description
Component Name of ISE component, such as ISE module, Na+ Electrode, etc.
Rated Number of hours that the manufacturer announces the ISE
Hours component can work for. The component should be replaced once
the actual time exceeds this rated time.
Rated Number of tests that the manufacturer announces the ISE
Tests component can experience. The component should be replaced
once the actual tests exceed this rated value.
Last Date when the component was recently replaced.
Replace
Working Total time that the component has worked for since recently
Hours replaced.
Nr. of Tests Number of tests that the component has experienced since
recently replaced.
Remark Comment of the component.
2. See the Remark column of the components. If a component must be replaced,

select Replace. The Replace ISE Component dialog box is displayed.
3. Replace the component and enter the following information:
Field Description
Rated Hours Enter the maximum time(hour) the component can last once
installed. If the time is exceeded, the system will remind the
user to replace in the Remark column of the ISE Component
Status list.

Field Description
Rated Tests Maximum number of tests the component is allowed to
experience. If the number is exceeded, the system will remind
the user to replace in the Remark column of the ISE
Component Status list.
NOTE
For non-electrode component, the Rated Tests field is read-only and
left blank by default.
For reagent module, both the Rated Hours and Rated Tests fields are
read-only and left blank by default.
4. Select OK. The relevant information in the ISE Component Status list is
updated.
Replacing Reagent Pack

When the reagent pack of the ISE module is used for a long time, check the reagent
status on the ISE tab and replace the reagent pack if necessary.
1. Select the Inquire button. The values in the Reagent Pack Information area
are updated automatically.
2. If the reagent has been expired or used up, select the Rgt. Pack button. A
message pops up asking for your confirmation to replace the reagent pack.
3. Replace the reagent pack with a new one, and then select OK. The values in the
Reagent Pack Information area are refreshed automatically.
Executing ISE Instruction

When the ISE module has been used for a long time, it should be maintained properly
for best performance. The ISE page of the Utilities screen provides you with multiple
maintenance instructions, which are used to maintain the ISE module in necessary
conditions. Execute the instructions as instructed in the table below.
ISE Description Operating Procedures

Maintenance
Instruction
Two-point This instruction is used to 1. Select Two-point
Calibration calibrate the electrodes of Calibration, and then select
the ISE module. Execute. The Confirm dialog box
pops up.
2. Select OK to start calibrating
the electrodes of the ISE module.
Clean Cycle This instruction is used to 1. Select Clean Cycle, and
remove the protein build-up then select Execute. The
from the ISE module Confirm dialog box pops up.
electrodes.
2. Select OK to start cleaning
the electrodes of the ISE module.
Maintenance This instruction is used to 1. Select Maintenance Cycle,
Cycle remove the calibrant A in and then select Execute. The
electrode tubing before

replacing electrodes, etc. Confirm dialog box pops up.
2. Select OK to start
maintaining the ISE module.
Pump This instruction is used to 1. Select Pump Calibration
Calibration calibrate the peristaltic Cycle, and then select Execute.
Cycle pumps of the ISE module. The Confirm dialog box pops up.
the pumps of the ISE module.
Bubble This instruction is used to 1. Select Bubble Calibration
Calibration calibrate the air bubble Cycle, and then select Execute.
Cycle detector of the ISE module. The Confirm dialog box pops up.
the air bubble detector of the ISE
module.
Failure This instruction is used to 1. Select Failure Recovery,
Recovery recover the ISE module, and then select Execute. The
which is suffering from Confirm dialog box pops up.
failures.
2. Select OK. The system starts
recovering the ISE module.
Purge A Cycle This instruction is used to 1. Select Purge A Cycle, and
purge calibrant A through the then select Execute. The
tubing from the reagent Confirm dialog box pops up.
module to the ISE module.
2. Select OK to start the purge
A cycle.
Purge B Cycle This instruction is used to 1. Select Purge B Cycle, and
purge calibrant B through then select Execute. The
the tubing from the reagent Confirm dialog box pops up.
module to the ISE module.
B cycle.
Purge This instruction is used to 1. Select Purge Combination
Combination purge calibrant A and B and set up the purge times for
through the tubing from the calibrant A and B. Then select
reagent module to the ISE Execute. The Confirm dialog box
module. pops up.
combination cycle.
4.14 Shutdown
Select Shutdown from the function buttons area of the main screen. The Shutdown

Figure4-92 Shutdown Dialog Box
The following table explains the fields on the dialog box.
Field Description
Log Off Select this option to relog on with another username or enter the
protection status.
Refer to Logging Off in the section for details.
Sleep Select this option to enter the power-saving mode. You can
wake up the system in no time when emergent samples need to
be analyzed.
Exit Select this option to save all measurement data and exit the
operating software.
Emergence Select this option to exit the operating software without
Exit performing shutdown check.
Logging Off
Operations of the operating software are entitled to different authorities. Some
advanced operations can be conducted only by the users who possess
corresponding authority. Refer to 4.12.4 User for instructions of user and authority
management. You can relog on the analyzer with another username without
rebooting the system.
NOTE
When logging off, the system must not be in editing status but
experiencing measurement.
1. Select Log Off from the Shutdown dialog box and select OK. The following
Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Figure4-93 Confirm Dialog Box for Logoff
2. Select OK. The Log Off dialog box pops up.
Figure4-94 Log Off Dialog Box
3. Select any of the following options:
Protected: Enter the software protection status. Other users cannot operate
the system.
Relog on: Log on the system again with another username.
4. Select OK and enter correct username and password on the popup Login dialog
box.
5. Select OK.
Sleeping
When the system will not be used for a while, you can use the sleep function to let the
system enter power-saving mode and then wake up the system quickly in case of
emergent samples.
Select Sleep on the Shutdown dialog box and then select OK. A prompt message
appears indicating that the system is going to sleep. Then the system enters Sleeping
status and displays the following screen.

Figure4-95 Sleeping Screen
Switch off the power of the sleeping units. The system turns off the lamp and
temperature control as you have configured on the System page of the Setup
screen.
To continue analysis and wake up the system, enter the username and password in
the Login dialog box; and then select OK.

For Your Notes

5 Service and Maintenance
To ensure reliability, good performance and service life of the system, regular
maintenance is required. Be sure to follow the instructions given below to maintain
the system. Even you’re only an operator, it’s very important for you to learn this
chapter. Your thorough understanding will help you obtain the best performance of
the system.
In case of problems beyond your ability or not covered in this chapter, be sure to
contact our customer service department or your local distributor.
WARNING
Do not perform any maintenance procedures that are not described
in this chapter.
Do not touch the components other than the ones specified in this
chapter.
Performing unauthorized maintenance procedures may damage your
system, void any applicable warranty or service contract and even
cause personal injury.
After performing any maintenance actions or procedures, ensure that
the system runs normally.
Do not spill water or reagent on mechanical or electrical components
of the system.
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles during
maintaining process.
5 Service and Maintenance 5-1

5.1 Preparation
The following tools, wash solution and ethanol may facilitate your maintenance.
5.1.1 Tools
Hex wrenches (M1.5, M3 and M4)
Cross-headed screwdrivers (large, medium and small)
Needle tube
Tweezers
Clean gauze
5.1.2 Wash Solution

Acid: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid
Alkaline: 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution
WARNING
Poisonous gas will be produced if acid wash solution is mixed with
alkaline wash solution. Do not mix the acid wash solution with the
alkaline one.
CAUTION
Our company has specified the following enhanced wash solutions:
Acid wash solution: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid;
Alkaline wash solution: Alkaline: 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution.
You should dilute the sodium hypochlorite solution at appropriate ratio
according to the available chlorine contained in it.
Be sure to use the enhanced wash solution specified by our company.
Otherwise, proper result may not be obtained.
We recommend the acid and alkaline wash solutions be used
alternately. For instance, if the acid wash solution is used at current
startup, the alkaline one should be used at next startup.
5.1.3 Others
Water-free ethanol
Disinfectant
5.2 Daily Maintenance

5.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes
Follow this procedure to check the sample and reagent syringes. The purpose of this
check is to ensure the syringes do not leak.
1 Place the Power to OFF.
5-2 5 Service and Maintenance

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the two reagent syringes
on the left and one sample syringe on the right.
T-piece
Plunger Guide Cap
3 Check whether the T-piece leaks and air bubbles exist in the syringe.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, tighten the T-piece or remove the air bubbles. See 5.6.2 Replacing
Syringe Plunger Assembly and 5.8.7 Removing Air Bubbles.
4 Check whether the plunger guide cap leaks.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, replace the cap as instructed by 5.6.2 Replacing Syringe Plunger
Assembly.
5 Close the front doors of the analyzer.
5.2.2 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Reset and then click Execute to
clean the sample probe.
2 Check if the flow from inside the sample probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the sample probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the sample probe as instructed by 5.8.1.2 Unclogging
Sample Probe. If the flow remains abnormal, contact our customer
service department or your local distributor.
5.2.3 Checking/Cleaning R1/R2 Probes

clean the reagent probe.
2 Check if the flow from inside the reagent probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the reagent probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the reagent probe as instructed by 5.8.2.2 Unclogging
Reagent Probe. If the flow remains abnormal, contact our customer

5.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers
clean the mixer.
2 During the cleaning process, check whether the mixer rotates correctly
and water surge in the wash well of mixer works normally. If not, contact
our customer service department or your local distributor.
5.2.5 Checking Connection of Deionized Water

1 Open the front doors of the analyzer.
2 Pull out the hydropneumatic drawer. Check if the inlet ball valve is turned
on (the handle of ball valve is placed level) and DI water exists in the water
tank.
Ball Valve
3 Check all connectors for leakage. If leakage does exist, contact our
customer service department or your local distributor.
4 Restore the drawer.
6 If the water unit is equipped, please ensure it is properly connected to the
analyzer.
7 Check if the water unit is powered on.
CAUTION
Make sure the tubing in the hydropneumatic drawer is neither clogged
nor bent.
5.2.6 Checking Waste Tubing
BIOHAZARD
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves and lab coat
and, if necessary, goggles when checking the waste tubing.
Check if the waste drainage system works normally. Ensure the waste tubing is
neither bent nor clogged, and the high-/low-concentration waste is handled properly
according to local regulations and rules for waste disposal.

CAUTION
Ensure the waste tubing is neither clogged nor bent. Clogged or bent
waste tubing may lead to waste overflow that can damage your
analyzer.
NOTE
If leakage remains after the above-mentioned operations are
performed, please contact our customer service department or your
local distributor.
5.2.7 Checking Vacuum/Pressure Pumps

1 Ensure the analyzer is in Standby status.
2 Open the front doors of the analyzer and check the readings on the
vacuum/pressure gauges.
NOTE
The readings and reference ranges for vacuum and pressure
are:
Primary pressure gauge: 25.0 psig; Reference range:
0.16-0.19MPa.
Secondary pressure gauge: 5.0 psig; Reference range:
0.03-0.04MPa.
DI water pressure gauge: 10.0 psig; Reference range:
0.06-0.08Mpa.
Vacuum gauge: 27.0Hg (-60- -95KPa).
3 If the vacuum/pressure readings are incorrect, please contact our customer

5.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper

Check if the power and status indicators on the printer are illuminated correctly, and if
sufficient paper is prepared.
5.2.9 ISE Unit (optional)
5.2.9.1 Daily Cleaning
BIOHAZARD
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the below checks.
For application of the cleaning solution, refer to its operation manual
for details.

CAUTION
Use the consumables recommended by us. Other consumables may
degrade system performance.
Add solution supplied in the cleaning solution kit to top of label on the
powder bottle that is also supplied in the same kit and shake well to
prepare the cleaning solution.
The cleaning solution must be stored at 2-8°C and discarded after two
weeks.
NOTE
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
You should perform the maintenance once a day after all the samples
are analyzed. Besides, if the samples of a day requested for the ISE
tests are 50 or more, you should perform the maintenance after 50
samples are analyzed.
If you give the electrodes some time to stabilize after cleaning, you will
experience slightly better performance.
1 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.

2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start the
clean cycle.
4 After cleaning, if there are samples requested for the ISE tests to be run,
calibration should be run first. But we recommend running an ISE
calibration after cleaning.
ISE unit daily cleaning can be configured to operate automatically. See 4.13.5 ISE for
details.
5.2.9.2 Pump Calibration

2 Select Pump Calibration Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start
calibrating the peristaltic pumps.
Pump calibration can be configured to operate automatically. See 4.13.5 ISE for
details.

5.3 Weekly Maintenance
5.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe
WARNING
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk.
3 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move
the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
convenient to operate.

4
CAUTION
Do not contact the sample probe directly with tweezers;
otherwise the sample probe may be scratched. Excessive
force may bend the sample probe.
NOTE
We recommend the acid and alkaline wash solution be used
alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid wash
solution is used for last maintenance, the alkaline one should
be used for this time.
Use ethanol-dipped gauze to gently wipe the exterior of the sample probe
until it is clean and smooth.
5 Wipe the sample probe with DI water-dipped gauze.

6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to
move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.
7 Install the sample disk, tighten the two retaining screws on it and then cover
the sample compartment.
8 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the sample
probe and rinse it with deionized water.
5.3.2 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes
WARNING
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk by pulling
upwards the handles.
3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
4
CAUTION
Do not contact the reagent probe directly with tweezers;
otherwise the reagent probe may be scratched. Excessive
force may bend the reagent probe.
NOTE
Use ethanol-dipped gauze to gently wipe the exterior of reagent probe

until it is clean and smooth.

5 Wipe the reagent probe with DI water-dipped gauze.
6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
7 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the
reagent probe and rinse it with deionized water.
5.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers
BIOHAZARD
2 Pull the mixer arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
mixer to a position convenient to operate.

3
CAUTION
Do not contact the mixer directly with tweezers; otherwise it
may be scratched. Excessive force may bend the mixer.
NOTE
Use ethanol-dipped gauze to gently wipe the mixer until it is clean and
smooth.
4 Wipe the mixer with DI water-dipped gauze.

5 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the mixer
automatically and rinse it with deionized water.
CAUTION
The mixer is precisely fabricated. In case of scratched or bent mixer,
replace it according to 5.8.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers.
5.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader

Windows
CAUTION
Do not stare at the laser of the bar code reader; otherwise your eyes
may get hurt.

2 Uncover the reagent or sample compartment, and remove the reagent disk
or sample disk.
3 Use the wash solution-dipped gauze to wipe the bar code reader window.
4 Install the reagent disk or sample disk and cover the compartment.
5 Place the Power to ON. After about 30 seconds, the system will reset
automatically.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp-edged tools to scratch the bar code reader window.
5.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk by pulling
upwards the handle.
3 Rinse the sample disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.
4 Wipe the inside of the sample compartment using clean gauze or, if
necessary, the gauze dipped with water or disinfectant.

5 Install the sample disk and tighten the two retaining screws on it. Then
cover the sample compartment.
5.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and loosen the screws on the reagent
disk. Then remove the reagent disk.
3 Rinse the reagent disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.
4 Wipe the inside of the reagent compartment using clean gauze or, if
necessary, the gauze dipped with water or disinfectant.

5 Install the reagent disk and together the screws on it. Then cover the
reagent compartment.
5.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit
WARNING
The probe/mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe/mixer.
BIOHAZARD

2 Wipe the panels using clean gauze or, if necessary, the gauze dipped with
water or disinfectant.
5.3.8 Checking Photometer

Reaction cuvettes and light source should be checked regularly and replaced if
necessary, for contaminated reaction cuvettes and low transmittance may affect the
test results; also weak stability and radiation intensity of the light source will cause
unreliable test results.
5.3.8.1 Checking Reaction Cuvettes

After performing enhanced wash of the reaction cuvettes, proceed with the following
steps to check the cuvettes.

1 Enter the Daily Maint. page of the Utilities screen; then select
Cuvette/Lamp Check in the Maintenance area and click Execute.
The Cuvette/Lamp Check dialog box is displayed. Execute the Cuvette

command to check reaction cuvettes.
2 Make sure the light source is steady after 20 minutes since the system is
started up.

3 The system begins running water test on the 90 cuvettes. In case any
abnormities occur during the testing, the following warning messages will
be prompted, you should take actions according to the messages:
”Lamp is not turned on.” Æ Check if the lamp is turned on.
”No cuvette or light too strong.”Æ Load cuvettes or adjust the light gain.
”Light too weak or fiber bundle failure”Æ Check if the fiber is broken; if not,
replace the lamp.
”Light is not steady. If the lamp has been on for over 20 minutes, replace
the lamp”ÆCheck the lamp by running tests after starting up the system for
20 minutes; if failure remains, replace the lamp.
4 When tests are finished, select Save. The Cuvette/Lamp Check dialog
box displays the reaction cuvettes with updated status. The cuvette
indicated by Red must not be used and should be replaced immediately.
The cuvettes in yellow are very dirty and would better to be replaced.
5 Double click on any cuvette button. A dialog box will pop up, showing the
latest 10 checking records (absorbance of the 12 wavelengths) and check
date of the cuvette.
5.3.8.2 Checking Light Source

1 Enter the Daily Maint. page of the Utilities screen; then select
Cuvette/Lamp Check in the Maintenance area and click Execute. The
Cuvette/Lamp Check dialog box is displayed. Execute the Lamp
command to check the light source.
2 Make sure the light source is steady after 20 minutes since the system is
started up.
3 The system begins running water test on 5 cuvettes. In case any
abnormities occur during the testing, the following warning messages will
be prompted, you should take actions according to the messages:
”Lamp is not turned on.” Æ Check if the lamp is turned on.
”No cuvette or light too strong.”Æ Load cuvettes or adjust the light gain.
”Light too weak or fiber bundle failure”Æ Check if the fiber is broken; if not,
replace the lamp.
”Light is not steady. If the lamp has been on for over 20 minutes, replace
the lamp”ÆCheck the lamp by running tests after starting up the system for
20 minutes; if failure remains, replace the lamp.
4 When tests are finished. A dialog box will pop up, showing the latest 10
checking records (absorbance valve) of the light source.
5.3.9 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes

Contaminated reaction cuvettes may lead to incorrect results. The reaction cuvettes
should be cleaned regularly.
1 Place a 60ml bottle with wash solution (1mol sodium hypochlorite or 0.5%
NaOH) on specified position of reagent disk. Use the two solutions
alternately every week.
2 On the Daily Maint. page, select Cuvette Cleaning and then click
Execute. All cuvettes on the reaction disk are washed.

5.3.10 Checking Concentrated Wash Solution
WARNING
Concentrated wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Always
wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles when checking
the wash solution. In case your skin or clothes contact the wash
solution, wash them off with soap and clean water. In case the wash
solution spill into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an
oculist.
If there is no enough concentrated wash solution, system operation may be

interrupted. Perform the following procedures to check the wash solution.
1 On the Daily Maint. page, select Concentrated Wash Solution Refilling

and then click Execute.
2 The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start refilling concentrated
wash solution.
3 After the pressure in wash solution tank is released, the Refill
Concentrated Wash Solution dialog box is displayed.
WARNING
If you do not release the pressure before uncapping the
concentrated wash solution tank, the wash solution may
spill out.
In case your skin or clothes contact the wash solution,
wash them off with soap and clean water. In case the wash
solution spill into your eyes, rinse them with much water
and consult an oculist.
4 Open the front doors of the analyzer and pull the hydropneumatic assembly
drawer outwards.
5 Check if there is enough concentrated wash solution A and B.

If not, uncap the wash solution tank and refill more wash solution, then cap
the tanks tightly.
6 Select OK on the Refill Concentrated Wash Solution dialog box. The
concentrated wash solution refilling is completed.

5.4 Two-week Maintenance
5.4.1 Maintaining Hydropneumatic Components
When the system is used for a long period of time, condensed water will accumulate
in the oil mist separator and mist separator. You are recommended to perform the
following steps to empty the separators every two weeks.

2 Loosen the black caps at the bottom of the oil mist separator(left) and mist
separator(right) in the direction indicated by “O”. The fluid in the
separators is drained automatically by gravity.
Drain Caps
3 After all the liquid in the separators is removed, tighten the drain caps in
the direction indicated by “S”.
5.5 Monthly Maintenance

5.5.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

2 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
3 Use cotton swabs to clean the inside of and the places around the wash
well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to
move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the sample probe automatically.
5.5.2 Cleaning Wash Well of R1/R2 Probes
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
the reagent probes automatically.
5.5.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers
WARNING
The mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the mixer.
BIOHZARD

well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.
the mixers automatically.
5.5.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
3 Wipe the sample probe rotor with clean gauze.
5.5.5 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes Rotors
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and

3 Wipe the reagent probe rotor with clean gauze.
5.5.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors
WARNING
BIOHAZARD


3 Wipe the mixer rotor with clean gauze.
5.5.7 Checking Wash Unit

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select Wash Unit Maintenance and then click
Execute.
2 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening
and the lower part to other wash probes. Adjust the wipe block if
necessary.
3 Check the wash probes for stains and cracks, and replace the probes if
any.
5.5.8 Checking Hydropneumatic Drawer

2 Pull outwards the hydropneumatic drawer.
3 Check if the tubing connectors are leaking or water buildup exists below
the drawer.
If yes, please contact our customer service department or your local

distributor.
4 Push the drawer inward to restore it.

5.5.9 Cleaning Air Filter, Oil Mist Separator, Mist Separator
1 Place the Main Power to OFF.
2 Remove the bottles of the air filter, oil mist separator and mist separator.
3 Clean the bottles using neutral cleaning solution.

4 Install the bottles back to the bracket.
5.6 Three-month Maintenance

5.6.1 Cleaning Dust Screens
1 Place the Main Power to OFF.
3 Remove the dust screens that are located below the reagent syringes and
sample syringe.

Hold the screen with your hands and lift it upwards, then remove it
outwards.
4 Rinse the dust screen with fresh water and dry it by air.
5 Install the dust screens correctly.
5.6.2 Replacing Syringe Plunger Assembly

The plungers of sample and reagent syringes may be worn out after a certain period
of service. A worn-out plunger may lead to leakage, which will consequently result in
inaccurate aspiration and unreliable test results. You should check the syringes
everyday and replace the old plunger assembly with a new one when,
The old one has served for three months; or

The old one has been used for over 100,000 tests; or
The old one is apparently damaged.
WARNING
CAUTION
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
degrade the system performance.
Exercise caution when installing the plunger assembly. Excessive
force may crack the syringe.
Always wear gloves while replacing the syringe plunger assembly.
Plunger assembly of sample syringe can be replaced in the same way as that of
reagent syringe. Perform the following steps to replace the reagent syringe plunger
assembly.

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the sample syringe on the
right and two reagent syringes on the left.

Retaining Screws T-piece
Reagent Syringe
Screws connecting
syringe bracket Drive Module
and drive module
Syringe Bracket
3 Prepare a new plunger assembly as shown in the figure below. Soak the
plunger tip in deionized water to eliminate bubbles.
Plunger Tip Plunger Rod Plunger Button

Plunger Guide Cap
4 Unscrew counter-clockwise the four upper retaining screws of the syringe,
then remove the screws and space bar.
5 Unscrew counter-clockwise the lower retaining screw of the syringe, then
remove the syringe from the holder.
6
CAUTION
There may be residual water in the syringe connector. Do not
drop water onto the analyzing unit during operation.
Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand and unscrew counter-clockwise the syringe. Exercise caution so that
the gasket on the syringe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a clean
place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been disassembled for
2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling precision be
affected.
7
CAUTION
There may be residual water in the syringe. Do not drop
water onto the analyzing unit during operation.
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution
when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.
Unscrew counter-clockwise the plunger guide cap, pinch the plunger button
and gently pull the plunger assembly from the syringe.

Syringe Connector Syringe Plunger Guid Cap Plunger Rod Plunger Button
8
CAUTION
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution
when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.
Pinch the new plunger assembly by the plunger button and carefully insert
the plunger tip into the syringe and push it all the way to the end. Screw
clockwise the plunger guide cap until secure.
9 Immerse the syringe connector into deionized water. Pinch the plunger
button, pull it to aspirate half syringe of deionized water and then push it to
expel the deionized water and the air from the syringe.
10 Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand. Screw clockwise the syringe into the T-piece until secure.
11 Place the syringe on the holder.
12 Install the space bar and four upper retaining screws. Do not tighten the
screws now.
13 Align the plunger button to the lower retaining screw of the plunger and
screw clockwise the screw until secure.
14 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe.
15 Tighten the four upper retaining screws.
16 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds, then execute System
Prime on the Daily Maint. page. Repeat the instruction for several times if
necessary, and check if the T-piece is leaking.
If not, go to the next step.
If yes, tighten the syringe. If leakage remains, please contact our customer
5.7 Six-month Maintenance

5.7.1 Replacing Lamp
The lamp of the photometric system ages after a certain period of service. An aged
lamp may introduce extra noise during the analyzing process. Replace the lamp
when its intensity decreases to the specified degree, or its service time has added up
to 1,000 hours.

CAUTION
Do not touch either the light entrance of the lamp housing or the lens in
front of the lamp. In case the entrance is dirty, clean it with
ethanol-soaked degreased cotton.
1 Place the Main Power to OFF. Wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp and its
housing to cool down.
WARNING
After working for a while, the lamp and its housing are usually
hot enough to burn you. Do not proceed with this procedure
until they have cooled down.
2 Loosen the three screws on the rear cover of the analyzer, then remove the
rear cover.
3 Loosen the screws on lower part of the lamp housing and remove the
radiator from the housing.
4 Pinch the lamp base with one hand and press the lever on the left of the
base and remove the lamp.
5 Pinch the new lamp by its base and insert the lamp pins into the mounting
holes.
NOTE
The larger pin should be inserted into the larger hole and the
smaller pin into the smaller hole.
6 Install the radiator back to the original position and tighten the screws.

7 Close the rear cover of the analyzer and tighten the three screws.
5.7.2 Replacing or Cleaning Air Screen

This maintenance operation must be performed by service personnel, please contact
5.7.3 Cleaning Tanks, Floater Switch and Siphon Tube

5.7.4 Replacing or Cleaning Air Filter and Silencer

5.7.5 Replacing Waste Tubing

5.7.6 Replacing DI Water Filter

The deionized water filter should be replaced by the user in every 3-6 months.
Perform the following steps:
1 Install the deionized water filter assembly, sleeve seal tape at the
connector and tighten the connector with a wrench.
2 Turn off the ball value on the hydropneumatic drawer. The water supply
module is powered off.
3 Turn on the ball valve on the water supply module to release the remaining
pressure. When the pressure gauge indicates 0, turn off the ball value.
4 Remove the tubing 91 and 92 from two ends of the old filter assembly.
5 Connect the tubing 91 and 92 to the two ends of the new filter assembly.
6 Power on the water supply module and turn on the ball valve on it. When
you see the water supply module is supplying water, turn off its ball valve.
The reading on the pressure gauge of the water supply module should be
around 0.25MPa.
7 Turn on the ball valve on the hydropneumatic drawer.
5.8 As-Needed Maintenance

5.8.1 Unclogging Sample Probe
When the sample probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the sample probe.

5.8.1.1 Removing Sample Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk by pulling
upwards the handle.
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and convenient
to operate.

4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover with your hands and pull them slightly
outwards and then remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5 Hold the sample probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other hand. Rotate the tubing connector
counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the sample probe. Remove the
tubing from the probe.
6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the circuit connector
from the board with the other hand.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit
board.
7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the sample

probe and take out the spring.

8
WARNING
Store the removed sample probe in a safe place where it will
neither endanger people working around the area nor be
damaged.
NOTE
Exercise caution when pulling the sample probe away from
the arm so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage
the probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a
clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling
precision be affected.
NOTE
The sample probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. In case of scratched or bent sample probe,
replace it according to 5.8.3 Replacing Sample Probe.
5.8.1.2 Unclogging Sample Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
1 Use a needle to unclog the sample probe from the tip.
CAUTION

5.8.1.3 Installing Sample Probe
WARNING
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Insert the sample probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the
hole on probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.
3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.
4 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
If yes, proceed to the next step.

If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.
5 Connect the sample probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6 Place a washer in the tubing connector, and then screw clockwise the
probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.
7 Place the Power to ON.

8 Add deionized water to a clean cup. Immerse the sample probe tip into the
water by 2 to 3mm. The LED on the circuit board will be lighted. Take the
probe tip out of water. The LED will go out.
If the test is passed, proceed to the next step.
If not, please contact our customer service department or your local

distributor.
9 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm
base.
10 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
11 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the
probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION
After installation, be sure to move the sample probe to a
position above its wash well.
12 Install the sample disk and cover the sample compartment.

the sample probe automatically.
CAUTION
5.8.2 Unclogging R1/R2 Probes

When the reagent probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the reagent probe.

WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
5.8.2.1 Removing Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk.
Refer to 5.8.1.1 Removing Sample Probe for details.
3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point. Then rotate the arm to
4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover and pull them slightly outwards and
remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5 Hold the reagent probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other hand. Rotate the tubing connector
counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the reagent probe. Remove the
tubing from the probe.

6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the circuit connector
from the board with the other hand.
Connectors
Retaining Screw
and Spring
CAUTION
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit
board.
7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the reagent

probe and take out the spring.
8
WARNING
Store the removed reagent probe in a safe place where it will
neither endanger people working around the area nor be
damaged.
NOTE
Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the arm
so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage the
probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a
clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling
precision be affected.
NOTE
The reagent probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. In case of scratched or bent reagent probe,
replace it according to 5.8.4Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe.

5.8.2.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
1 Use a needle to unclog the reagent probe from the tip.
CAUTION
5.8.2.3 Installing Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Insert the reagent probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the
hole on probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.
See 5.8.1.3 Installing Sample Probe for details.
3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.
4 Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
5 Connect the reagent probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.

6 Place a washer in the tubing connector, and then screw the probe’s fluid
connector back to the tubing connector.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.

8 Add deionized water to a clean cup. Immerse the reagent probe tip into the
water by 2 to 3mm. The LED on the circuit board will be lighted. Take the
probe tip out of water. The LED will go out.
If the test is passed, proceed to the next step.
If not, please contact our customer service department or your local
distributor.
9 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm base.
10 Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
If not, reinstall the arm cover and check the spring.
11 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the
reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION
After cleaning, be sure to move the reagent probe to a
position above its wash well.
12 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.

the reagent probes automatically.
CAUTION
5.8.3 Replacing Sample Probe

If the sample probe is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it
immediately.

WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
1 Remove the bent or damaged sample probe as instructed by 5.8.1.1

Removing Sample Probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the bent or damaged sample probe in accordance
with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste
disposal.
2 Install a new sample probe as instructed by 5.8.1.3 Installing Sample

Probe.
CAUTION
After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to sample disk installation.
5.8.4 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe

When too much water exists in sample probe wash well and cannot be drained, the
wash well might have been clogged. You should follow this procedure to clean the
wash well.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD


3 Add alkaline wash solution or 0.5% sodium hypochlorite to the wash well
and soak it for 10 minutes.
6 Execute “System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset
and rinse the sample probe and wash well automatically with deionized
water. Check if the sample probe wash well drains liquid normally.
5.8.5 Replacing R1/R2 Probes

If the reagent probe is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it
immediately.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
1 Remove the bent or damaged probe as instructed by 5.8.2.1 Removing

Reagent Probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the bent or damaged reagent probe in accordance
with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste
disposal.
2 Install a new reagent probe as instructed by 5.8.2.3 Installing Reagent

Probe.
CAUTION
After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to reagent disk installation.
5.8.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers

If the mixer is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it immediately.

WARNING
When replacing, pinch the mixer only by its knurled part. Protect the
flat part of the mixer from scratches.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the damaged mixer in accordance with your local or
CAUTION

2 Prepare a new mixer. Wash the flat part of the new mixer with wash
solution-dipped gauze or cotton swabs and then wipe it with DI
water-dipped gauze.
3 Gently pull the mixer to its highest point and rotate it to a position
4
CAUTION
When trying to pull out the mixer, concentrate your force in
the direction of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased force may
damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Pinch the mixer by the knurled part and unscrew counter-clockwise the
retaining nut until the mixer looses. Pull the mixer downward to remove it
and remove the nut.

5 Align the new mixer to the bigger hole of the retaining nut and gently screw
it into the nut until the end of the mixer is in line with the smaller hole of the
nut.
6 Pinch the mixer by the knurled part and align the nut hole to the axis of the
mixer and push the nut onto the mixer until it reaches the end of the mixer.
Tighten the nut by screwing it clockwise.
CAUTION
When trying to push the mixer into the arm, concentrate your
force in the direction of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased
force may damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Ensure the mixer is all the way pushed to the end.
7 After replacing the bar, visually check whether the mixer is vertical to the
bar arm.
If not, return to step 5 to remove the mixer and reinstall it.
8 Pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate it back to a position above
its wash well.
CAUTION
After installing the mixer, be sure to rotate it to a position
above its wash well.
the mixers automatically.
5.8.7 Removing Air Bubbles

When you see air bubbles in the syringe, follow this procedure to remove them.

BIOHAZARD
protective clothing when doing the maintenance.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national

2 Loosen the screws on the syringe cover and remove the cover. You can
see the two reagent syringes on the left and sample syringe on the right.
3 Loosen the four upper retaining screws of the syringe, then remove the
screws and space bar.
4 Loosen the four lower retaining screws of the syringe and remove the
syringe from the holder.
5 Pull the plunger gently outwards until you can not proceed any more, and
then push it quickly. Repeat this pull-push operation until the air bubbles
are removed from the syringe.
CAUTION
Be sure not to push the plunger to the end tip; otherwise the
syringe may be damaged.
6 Place the syringe on the holder. Install the space bars and tighten the
upper retaining screws.
NOTE
The upper edge of the upper space bar must reach the 7th
scale on the syringe.
When fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them
alternately with equilibrium force.
7 Tighten clockwise the lower retaining screw until secure.
5.8.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette

After the Cuvette/Lamp Check instruction is performed, if a cuvette is found to be
damaged, write down the cuvette number and follow this procedure to replace the
cuvette.
WARNING
Before replacing cuvette rotate the probes to a position convenient for
operation.

BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the damaged cuvette in accordance with your local or
CAUTION
1 Place the Power to OFF

2 Rotate manually the probes and mixers to a position convenient for cuvette
replacement and then remove the reaction disk cover.
3 Use a hex wrench to loosen the three screws that fix the reaction disk.
4 Unplug the heater connector from the reaction disk.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when unplugging connectors so that the
leads and connectors will not be damaged.

5 Hold the reaction disk and remove it from the chamber.
6 Use your hand or tweezers to take out the damaged cuvette and then
install a new cuvette.
CAUTION
The damaged cuvette may be fixed tightly. Use tweezers to
remove the cuvette if necessary.
Do not touch the light entrance of the new reaction cuvette,
or accurate measurement may not be achieved.
Be sure to secure the retaining spring when installing the
reaction cuvette.
7 Install the reaction disk and make sure the three screws on the reaction
disk are tightened.
9 On the Daily Maint. page, execute the Cuvette/Lamp Check instruction
and view the execution result.
If the new cuvette is still identified as dirty or damaged, please contact our
customer service department or your local distributor.

5.9 Maintaining ISE Module(Optional)
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
NOTE
Generally after the replacement of any of the following components,
several ISE calibrations should be run before ISE Unit become stable.
5.9.1 Replacing Reagent Pack

1 Place the POWER to OFF.
2 Open the ISE unit door.
3 Remove and install a new reagent module. Refer to 2.8.1
Installing/Removing Reagent Pack.
5 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list. Enter “25” in the edit
boxes next to Purge A and Purge B in Parameters area, then select
Execute to start the purge cycle.
6 Execute Purge A Cycle and Purge B Cycle and check whether the
initialization of the Reagent Pack is finished. If no error occurs during the
process, the Reagent Pack is replaced successfully.
5.9.2 Replacing Electrodes
WARNING
Before performing the replacement, make sure the analyzer is
powered off.
If you run no more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the
electrodes according to the following recommended schedule:
Na+ Electrode 6 months

K+ Electrode 6 months
-
Cl Electrode 6 months
Li+ Electrode 6 months
Reference Electrode 6 months

If you run more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the
electrodes according to the following recommended schedule:
Na+ Electrode 10,000 samples

+
K Electrode 10,000 samples
Cl- Electrode 10,000 samples
Li+ Electrode 3,000 samples
Reference Electrode 10,000 samples
NOTE
Because the electrodes must be installed sequentially, you
have to take out the electrode to be replaced and those (or
that) over it from above to below.

2 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start maintaining the ISE
module.
3 Replace the electrodes, please refer to the 2.8.2 Installing/Removing
Electrodes.
4 Execute Purge A Cycle. If no error occurs during the process, it means the
electrode is replaced successfully.
5.9.3 Replacing Tubing

5.9.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional)
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
The ISE unit (optional) should be on power all the time. In some cases
that the POWER will be shut down for a long time more than half an
hour, the following steps should be performed.

2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
3 Pull out the joint A and joint B of the wand tubing which has been inserted
into the adapters of the pump tubing. Hold them on for a few seconds until
the solution in the wand tubing flows back to Reagent Pack.
Connectors
Pump Tubing Adapters
4 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list, and enter digit “25”
in the edit boxes to the right of Purge A and Purge B. Select Execute to
start the purge cycle based on the parameters you have entered.
5 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
6 Remove the electrodes. Refer to 2.8.2 Installing/Removing Electrodes.
7 Remove the Reagent Pack. Refer to 2.8.1 Installing/Removing Reagent
Pack.
8 Put the reference, Na+, Cl- and spacer electrodes into their individual
sealed bags.
9 Aspirate a small amount of Calibrant A from the port of the reagent module
with a syringe and inject it into the lumens of the K+ electrode(and Li+
electrode) until the lumens are full.
Cover both ends of the lumens with tapes to prevent the Calibrant A flows
from the lumens.
Put the K+ electrode into their individual sealed bags.
NOTE
The tube adapters on Reagent Pack should be covered by the red
caps. Store the Reagent Pack properly.
5.10 Maintenance Log Sheets

The following tables list the parts to be maintained and the maintenance schedules.
Please copy them every month and place a check mark in corresponding day column
after performing the maintenance item.

Table 5-1 Daily Maintenance
Month Day Year

R Maintenance Record
Daily e
Maintenance f. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Check sample
syringe
2 Check R1
syringe
3 Check R2
syringe
4 Check/clean
sample probe
5 Check/ clean R1
probe
6 Check/ clean R2
probe
7 Check/clean
sample mixer
8 Check/clean
reagent mixer
9 Check
connection of DI
water
10 Check waste
tubing
11 Check
vacuum/pressur
e pumps
12 Check
printer/paper
13 Clean ISE
module
14 Calibrate pumps

Table 5-2 Weekly Maintenance
Month Day Year
Maintenance Record
R
Weekly e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Maintenance f. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
1 Clean sample
probe
2 Clean R1 probe
3 Clean R2 probe
4 Clean sample
mixer
5 Clean reagent
mixer
6 Clean
sample/reagent
compartment
7 Clean sample
disk and reagent
disk
8 Clean wash unit
9 Clean analyzer
panels
1 Check
0 photometer
1 Clean reaction
1 cuvettes
1 Check cuvette
2 and lamp
1 Add
3 concentrated
wash solution

Table 5-3 Two-week Maintenance
Month Day Year
Maintenance Record
R
Two-week e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Maintenance f. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
1 Maintain
hydropneumatic
components

Table 5-4 Monthly Maintenance
Month Day Year
Maintenance Record
R
Monthly ef 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Maintenance . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
1 Clean wash well

of sample probe
2 Clean wash well

of R1 probe
3 Clean wash well

of R2 probe
4 Clean wash well

of sample mixer
5 Clean wash well

of reagent mixer
6 Clean sample
probe rotor
7 Clean R1 probe
rotor
8 Clean R2 probe
rotor
9 Clean sample
mixer rotor
1 Clean reagent
0 mixer rotor
1
1 Check wash unit
1 Check
2 hydropneumatic
drawer
1 Cleaning Air
3 Filter, Oil Mist
Separator, Mist
Separator

Table 5-5 Three-month Maintenance
Month Day Year
Maintenance Record
R
Three-month ef 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Maintenance . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
1 Clean dust
screens
2 Replace sample
syringe plunger
3 Replace R1
syringe plunger
4 Replace R2
syringe plunger

Table 5-6 Six-month Maintenance
Month Day Year
Maintenance Record
R
Six-month ef 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Maintenance . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
1 Replace lamp
2 Replace or clean
air screen
3 Check and clean

all tanks, floater
switch and siphon
pipe
4 Replace or clean
air filter and
silencer
5 Replace waste
tubing
6 Replace DI water
filter

Table 5-7 As-Needed Maintenance
Month Day Year
Maintenance Record
R
As-Needed ef 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Maintenance . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
1 Replace
sample probe
2 Replace R1
probe
3 Replace R2
probe
4 Replace
sample mixer
5 Replace
reagent mixer
6 Replace
reaction
cuvettes
7 Replacing
Reagent Pack
8 Replacing
Electrodes

6 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides the system warning messages and recommended corrective
actions, which should be taken in time once any error occurs.
If the recommended actions fail to solve problems, contact our customer service
When an error or failure occurs, relevant alarm message will be displayed, and the
system will take corresponding actions.
The alarm message will be displayed in the alarm message area of the software
screen, and then recorded in the system log automatically.
The logs will record the time, level, code and detailed information of each warning to
help user record and search errors. Refer to 4.13.3 Logs for details.
In case of a warning message, check its error code on the Logs screen, and find
recommended actions in the Solution field. If an error occurs and cannot be indexed
in the Logs field or this operation manual, please consult our customer service
6 Troubleshooting 6-1
Figure6-1 Warning Message Area
Warning Message Area
6.1 Classification of Error Messages

On the system, the error messages are divided into different types according to their
severity.
Severity: Warning
Level Description Actions taken by the system
0 Errors to warn user The system will warn the user of the errors like
calibration calculation failure. However, the
system running and test result will not be
affected.
Severity: Invalidating tests
1 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate the current test, and
tests run it again if configured. If the error occurs for
consecutive 2 times on the same test, the
system will not rerun such test.
2 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests in current

reagent batch that use the exact reagent.
3 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests of the

sample sample.
6-2 6 Troubleshooting
18 Errors to invalidate a When failure (such as sample collision) occurs
instruction during measurement, the system will
invalidate all tests associated with the current
instruction and rerun the tests.
Severity: Pausing
4 Errors to pause R1 The system will stop the sampling of R1 for

probe remaining tests and pause after finishing the
tests whose R1 has been dispensed.
5 Errors to pause R2 The system will stop the sampling of R2 for

probe remaining tests and pause after finishing the
tests whose R2 has been dispensed.
6 Errors to pause sample The system will invalidate all in-progress tests
probe whose sample is not dispensed and forbid
new tests. When other tests whose sampling
is done are finished, the system will pause and
wait for servicing.
7 Errors to pause The system will stop dispensing R1 without

reagent disk influencing sampling and other operations.
The system will continue the tests whose
reagent and sample is dispensed or whose
sample is not dispensed and invalidate other
tests. When the valid tests are finished, the
system will pause.
8 Errors to pause sample The system will invalidate the tests whose
mixer sample is not stirred and forbid new tests.
When the valid tests are finished, the system
will pause.
9 Errors to pause The system will invalidate the tests whose

reagent mixer reagent is not stirred and forbid new tests.
When the valid tests are finished, the system
will pause.
10 Errors to pause The system will stop dispensing R1 and

washing washing reaction cuvettes. When all valid tests
are finished, the system will pause.
Severity: Stopping analysis
11 Errors to stop analysis The system will invalidate all unfinished tests
in emergency and pause.
12 Errors to forbid test When test conditions are not met at system
startup, analysis will be forbidden.
Severity: Forbidding
13 Errors to forbid LIS The system will invalidate sending results to

and downloading sample from the LIS host
and should be connected to LIS again.
14 Errors to forbid ISE When the ISE module is configured but cannot
work normally, the system will forbid running
ISE analytes.
15 Errors to forbid sample When the sample bar code reader is

bar code reader configured but cannot work normally, the
system will forbid scanning samples.
16 Errors to forbid reagent When the reagent bar code reader is

bar code reader configured but cannot work normally, the
system will forbid scanning reagents.
17 Errors to forbid fluidic The system will prohibit the washing function.
system
Severity: Shutting down
19 Errors to exit When startup check is not passed, the system

will remind user of exiting the operating
software.
6.2 Corrective Measures

When an error occurs, check the error code on the Logs page of the Utilities screen
and then find corresponding measures in the following tables.
WARNING
When troubleshooting the analyzer, first find out whether it is necessary
to switch off the Main Power or Analyzing Unit Power.
BIOHAZARD
6.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit
6.2.1.1 Operating System

Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0001 19 Reinstall Windows
Operating Operating system is not XP or Windows 2000
system error Windows XP/2000 and the operating
software
C0002 19 Install a memory
Insufficient Memory is less than
above 128M and
memory 128M
reboot
C0003 19 Resolution Screen resolution is not Set resolution to
error 1024*768 1024*768
C0004 19 Set color to 65535
Color error Color is below 16 bits
and reboot
C0005 0 Rearrange hard disk.
Insufficient Remaining disk space is
Delete curves and
disk space less than 1G
other unuseful files
C0006 19 Rearrange hard disk.
Out of disk Remaining disk space is
Delete curves and
space less than 200M
other unuseful files
C0007 19 CPU
CPU is below Celeron
performance Replace PC or CPU
733
low
C0008 0 Check printer
Printer is not powered connection. Check if
Printer
on. Cable is not printer is powered
cannot be
connected. No driver is on, driver and default
connected
installed printer has been
installed
C0009 0 Check for paper jam.
Printer Paper jam. No paper. Check if printer is
failure No ink busy, and print tasks
are too many
C0010 0 Help No help document. Help Check if help
document document is damaged. document exists or is
error No memory space damaged
C0011 0 No sound card is
Sound card installed. Sound card Reinstall sound card
failure failure. Incorrect sound or sound card driver
card driver
6.2.1.2 Equipment Connection

Code Message
C0101 12 Equipment Serial cable is not Check serial port
cannot be connected. Analyzing connection. Replug
connected Unit Switch is cable. Check if
Code Message
powered off analyzing unit is
powered on. Start
initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
C0102 12 Check serial port
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Sending buffer is full.
analyzing unit is
cannot send Serial port is not
powered on. Start
instruction initialized
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
C0103 12 Check serial port
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Receiving buffer is
analyzing unit is
cannot full. Serial port is not
powered on. Start
receive data initialized
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
6.2.1.3 Calculation
Code Message
C0301 0 (%s Reagent blank
Replace reagent.
test)Calibratio absorbance is too
Replace calibrator.
n sensitivity high. Calibrator is
Recalibrate
error degenerated
C0302 0 (%s
test)Coefficien Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
t difference wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
limit is out of wrong Recalibrate
range
C0303 0 (%s
test)Correlatio
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
n
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
coefficient(R2
wrong Recalibrate
) is out of
range
C0304 0 (%s
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
test)Reaction
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
curve SD is
wrong Recalibrate
out of range
C0305 0 (%s Results cannot be
Replace reagent.
test)Calibratio calculated by
Replace calibrator.
n parameters specified rule. Results
Recalibrate or
cannot be are abnormal.
recalculate calibration
calculated by Calibration is not
parameters
given method convergent
Code Message
C0306 0 (%s
Reagent blank
test)Absorban Replace reagent.
absorbance is too
ce of 0 Replace calibrator.
high. Calibrator is
calibrator is Recalibrate
degenerated
out of range
C0307 0 (%s
Calibration replicates
test)Calibratio
are unfinished.
n data is Fill reagent and
Reagent is
incomplete. calibrator. Recalibrate
insufficient. Calibrator
Cannot
is insufficient
calculate
C0308 0 (%s test and
%d Key points are lost
sample)Resp during response Rerun
onse calculate calculation
error
C0309 0 (%s test and Abnormal sample
%d (hemolysis, etc).
Run diluted sample, or
sample)Resp Calibrator
recalibrate
onse is out of concentration is too
range low
C0310 0 If problem occurs
Communication
Received data frequently, reconnect
between analyzing
check sum serial cable. If problem
unit and operation
error remains, contact the
unit is interfered
developer
C0311 0 Control is
(%s
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
test)Real-time
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
QC 12s
Light intensity is Replace light source
warning
abnormal
C0312 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC of 13s is
out of control
abnormal
C0313 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC of 22s is
out of control
abnormal
C0314 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC R4s is out
of control
abnormal
C0315 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC 41s is out
of control
abnormal
Code Message
C0316 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC 10x is out
of control
abnormal
C0317 0 (%s
Calibrator goes
test)Calibratio Replace reagent or
wrong. Reagent goes
n repeatability calibrator. Recalibrate
wrong
is out of range
C0318 0 (%s
Incorrect reagent
test)Multi-poin
dispensing volume. Retest un-monotone
t or nonlinear
Incorrect calibrator points. Recalibrate
calibration is
dispensing volume.
not monotone
C0319 0 (%s)Result Abnormal test result. Rerun participated
cannot be Error occurs like 0 tests. Check and reset
calculated dividend calculation formula
C0320 0 (%d
sample/%s Response error.
test)Concentr Calibration formula Rerun or recalculate
ation cannot error
be calculated
C0321 0 Rerun, or rerun after
Absorbance is Sample goes wrong.
replacing reagent or
out of range Reagent goes wrong
sample
C0322 0 (%s test and Antigen excess. Too
%d much sample.
Dilute and rerun
sample)Prozo Sample concentration
ne check error is too high.
%d
Reagent is stored too Rerun after replacing
sample)R1
long or expired reagent
blank exceeds
limit
%d
sample)No
Rerun, or rerun after
linear interval Unsteady reagent.
replacing reagent or
in Kinetic Sample goes wrong
sample
analysis.
Cannot
calculate
6.2.1.4 Sample Bar Code

Code Message
C0401 0 Released sample is Check sample tube for
Sample
not unloaded. barcode mis-applying.
barcode %s
Barcode label is in Reprint and reapply
already exists
wrong place barcode label
Code Message
C0402 0 Barcode %s
Sample information Re-download or
has no
does not exist on LIS manually input request
corresponding
or is not downloaded information
request
C0403 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
C0404 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
6.2.1.5 Reagent Bar Code

Code Message
C0501 0 Deleted reagent is not
Check reagent bottle for
Reagent unloaded. Barcode
barcode mis-applying.
barcode %s label is in wrong
Reprint and reapply
already exists place. Reagent is
barcode label
used repeatedly
C0502 0 Barcode %s
Reagent barcode is
includes Rescan this reagent
printed in wrong
invalid barcode, or reprint and
format. Barcode scan
reagent rescan as configured
error
information
C0503 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
C0504 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
6.2.1.6 LIS Communication

Code Message
C0601 13 Check LIS connection
LIS host Abnormal network and network cable.
cannot be connection. LIS does Check if LIS host and
connected not start LIS station can start
normally
Incorrect accidentally, send or
segment receive again. If
Communication
sequence. problem occurs
failure
Required frequently, consult
segment lost developer of LIS or
equipment
Code Message
accidentally, send or
receive again. If
Required field Communication
problem occurs
lost failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Data type Communication
problem occurs
error failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Field value is Communication
problem occurs
not found failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong Communication
problem occurs
message type failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong event Communication
problem occurs
No. failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong Communication
problem occurs
process ID failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong version Communication
problem occurs
No. failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Code Message
Unknown receive again. If
Communication
keyword problem occurs
failure
identity frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Keyword receive again. If
Communication
identity problem occurs
failure
already exists frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Unknown Communication
problem occurs
error failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0613 0 Neglect. If problem
Your query
occurs frequently,
does not exist LIS failure
contact developer of
on LIS
LIS or equipment
C0614 13 Send and receive again
LIS host is
after a moment, or
busy. Cannot LIS failure
reconnect to LIS. Reset
respond
LIS
C0615 0 Check network
connection. If problem
LIS does not start.
LIS response occurs continuously for
Communication
is timed out 3 times, contact
failure
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0616 0 Check if LIS host works
normally. Reset LIS
host. If problem occurs
Application LIS host database
continuously for 3
record locked error
times, contact the LIS
manufacture or
equipment developer
6.2.1.7 Others
Code Message
C0701 2 All reagents in this
kind of bottles do not
Fill reagent of this test,
%s test has reach minimum limit.
or replace it with new
no enough %s All reagents of this
reagent
kind cannot be
detected
C0702 11 Check if equipment is
Analyzing unit is busy
Test period powered on. Restore
and cannot return
timed out. failure. Communicate
result, serial
Cannot with control software.
communication error,
continue Restart analyzing unit
or power failure
and operation unit
C0703 12 Retest dark current on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Dark current Excessive circuit
page. Adjust
is too high noise
photoelectric gain.
Contact your developer
C0704 12 Reset the main unit on
Analyzing unit Parameter
reset failed downloading failed
page
C0705 11 Restore failure on
Analyzing unit
Sensor failure. page. Restart analyzing
failure cannot
Motor/Belt failure unit and operation unit.
recover
Contact equipment
developer
C0706 0 No floppy disk or U
Storage disk is inserted. Check if U disk or
device error. Insufficient disk floppy disk is inserted or
Cannot export space. Floppy disk or full. Check if storage
data U disk is locked or device is damaged
damaged
C0707 0 No floppy disk or U
disk is inserted. File
Storage Check if U disk or
does not exist. File
device error. floppy disk is inserted or
error. File is
Cannot import full. Check if storage
damaged. Floppy
data device is damaged
disk or U disk is
locked or damaged
C0708 0 Insufficient
Insufficient acid wash Add acid wash solution
acid wash
solution on reagent on specified position of
solution on
disk reagent disk
reagent disk
Insufficient alkaline Add alkaline wash
alkaline wash
wash solution on solution on specified
solution on
reagent disk position of reagent disk
reagent disk
Code Message
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on reagent water on reagent disk
reagent disk
disk
Insufficient acid wash Add acid wash solution
acid wash
solution on sample on specified position of
solution on
disk sample disk
sample disk
Insufficient alkaline Add alkaline wash
alkaline wash
wash solution on solution on specified
solution on
sample disk position of sample disk
sample disk
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on sample water on sample disk
sample disk
disk
C0714 12 Check if lamp is turned
on, and retest light
Lamp aged (over source on
2000 hours). Lamp is Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Light intensity
not turned on. Lamp page. If failure remains,
is weak
is loose. All cuvettes replace the lamp. If
are dirty failure still remains,
contact equipment
developer
C0715 0 Perform cuvette blank
again. If blank limit is
exceeded for 10 times,
Cuvette is not
Blank of replace the cuvette. If
washed or still dirty.
cuvette %s problem occurs on all
Light intensity is too
exceeds limit cuvettes, replace the
weak
lamp. If problem
remains, contact
equipment developer
C0716 11 Received data is too
Received data Contact equipment
much and exceeds
overflow developer
buffer capacity
C0717 11 Sent data Instruction sending Contact equipment

overflow buffer is full developer
C0718 14 Calibrate the ISE

ISE test results are module when the
not received in given system is paused or
ISE test is
time; ISE module is idle. If problem occurs
timed out
not connected continuously for 3 times
correctly or other error occurs,
contact the developer
C0719 12 Lamp is not turned Check if lamp is
on; bulb is damaged; installed correctly and
Lamp is not no lamp is installed; turned on. If failure
turned on lamp is loose; foreign remains after replacing
matter exist in three the lamp, contact the
continuous cuvettes develop. Check if
Code Message
to obstruct light path foreign matters exist in
continuous three
cuvettes. Replace the
cuvettes if necessary
C0720 12 No cuvettes are Check if all positions of
No reaction installed in four reaction disk are
cuvettes, or continuous positions; occupied. If yes, ask
lamp intensity photoelectric gain our service personnel to
is too strong exceeds the adjust the photoelectric
measurement range gain
C0721 1 Check for failed cuvette
and replace it. If the
Foreign matters exist
Clots are error remains, check if
to obstruct light path
found in the lamp is installed
so that the measured
No.%s tightly. If the error still
value is less than
cuvette remains for all new
1000
cuvettes, contact our
service personnel
6.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit
6.2.2.1 Main Unit

Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0001 11 Restore failure on
Instruction format
Invalid error. Invalid
page. If this message
command information is
appears for 3 times,
included
A0002 12 Parameter Reset mechanically
Parameter downloading failed. and retry. If this failure
download error Parameter occurs for 3 times,
configuration error contact the developer
A0003 11 Wait for 30-60s and
Downloading retry. If system does
Main unit is
parameters to not respond for long
busy
subunits. Cannot time, restore failure. If
downloading
respond to other this problem occurs
parameters
instruction frequently, contact the
developer
Self-test error Self-test error page. If this message
Code
A0005 11 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
Invalid
Instruction execute failure on
instruction in
error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
current status
System is busy. Executing other on again. Restore
Cannot instruction. Cannot failure on
respond to respond to current Utilities-->Daily Maint.
other operation one page. If this message
on again. Restore
Instruction Instruction execute failure on
execute error error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
on again. Restore
E2PROM read/write failure on
Memory error
A0009 0 Received data in Rerun. If problem
Photoelectric
single period is less occurs frequently,
data is lost
than 90 contact the developer
A0010 11 If optic measurement
assembly goes wrong,
replace AD assembly.
If AD collection board
Photoelectric AD value is too low works normally,
output is (below 10) or too remove optic
abnormal high (over 65500) measurement
assembly, and check if
preamplification board
and optical path are
normal
A0011 11 Photoelectric data
Photoelectric Restart analyzing unit
buffer is full. Cannot
data overflow and operation unit
process new data
A0012 11 Photoelectric circuit
Photoelectric
does not return result Restart analyzing unit
collection is
via FIFO in specified and operation unit
timed out
time
Code
A0013 11
Restart analyzing unit

Downloading Incompatible or and replace with new
failed wrong version version. If failed again,
A0014 11
Connection error. Restart analyzing unit

Handshake Analyzing unit is and shake hand. If
failed performing other failed for 3 times,
operation contact the developer

Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
given time page. If this message
on again. Restore
No response,
or response
error
on again. Restore
Communication Instruction failure on
frame error communication error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
on again. Restore
Instruction failure on
Serial port error
communication error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
6.2.2.2 Sample Probe Unit
Code Message
A0101 6 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
Unit is busy. Unit parameters and restore
No execute
does not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
A0104 6 Wrong Switch off analyzing
sensor unit power and switch
status when on again. Restore
sample Vertical position failure on
probe sensor failure Utilities-->Daily Maint.
moves page. If this message
vertically(oth appears for 3 times,
er position) contact the developer
A0105 11 Wrong
Switch off analyzing
sensor
status when
on again. Restore
sample
Vertical position failure on
probe
sensor failure Utilities-->Daily Maint.
moves
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0106 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
Vertical position
home Restore failure. If failed
sensor failure.
position for 3 times, contact the
Obstruction exists in
when developer
vertical direction
moving
vertically(oth
er position)
Code Message
A0107 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0108 18 Sample
probe
If auto reset fails,
bumps when Wrong position.
restore failure. Remove
moving Obstruction exists
obstruction and reset
vertically(oth
er position)
A0109 18 Sample
probe
bumps when Wrong position.
vertically(IS
E unit)
A0110 18 Sample
probe
bumps when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
moving restore failure. Remove
Obstruction exists
vertically(in obstruction and reset
reaction
disk)
A0111 6 Lowering
down at Sample probe is not
current in vertical home
restore failure. If failed
position is position. Current
not position is not proper
developer
allowed(oth for lowering down
er position)
A0112 11 Lowering
down at
Sample probe is not
current If auto reset fails,
in vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
position is not proper
allowed(in developer
for lowering down
reaction
disk)
A0113 6 Wrong
sensor
status when
on again. Restore
sample
Rotational position failure on
probe
moves
horizontally(
other
position)
Code Message
sample Rotational position failure on
probe sensor failure Utilities-->Daily Maint.
moves page. If this message
horizontally( appears for 3 times,
ISE unit) contact the developer
A0115 11 Wrong
sensor
status when
on again. Restore
sample
Rotational position failure on
probe
moves
horizontally(i
n reaction
disk)
A0116 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally(
other
position)
A0117 11 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally(i
n reaction
disk)
A0118 18 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally( horizontally.
other
position)
A0119 11 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally(i horizontally.
n reaction
disk)
Code Message
A0120 6 Sample probe is not
Rotating at
in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
current
position. Current restore failure. If failed
height is not
height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
allowed(oth
for rotation(highest developer
er position)
position)
A0121 11 Rotating at Sample probe is not
current in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
height is not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(in height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
reaction for rotation(highest developer
disk) position)
A0122 6 If auto reset fails,
Syringe
sensor is in Syringe sensor error
wrong status
developer
A0123 6 Check if sample syringe
reaches maximum limit
Sample syringe
Syringe and cannot restore.
reaches maximum
cannot find Restore failure, or reset
stroke. Cannot
home after pushing syringe to
restore or dispense
position home position. If failed
sample
developer
A0124 3 Clog Wash sample probe.
Sample probe is
detection Remove probe and
clogged
error clear up foreign matters
A0125 11 Sample
probe does
not detect
No deionized water Add deionized water
wash
solution
level
A0126 1 Sample
probe does
not detect No R1 dispensed. Check if reagent is
liquid level Insufficient R1 sufficient. Rerun
on reaction
disk
A0127 3 Sample
probe does
No sample tube.
not detect Check if sample is
Sample is already
liquid level sufficient. Rerun
depleted
on sample
disk
A0128 1 Insufficient
sample Insufficient sample Check sample volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0129 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
aspirates full for 3 times, contact the
aspirates
abnormally developer
too much
Code Message
A0130 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
dispenses empty for 3 times, contact the
dispenses
abnormally developer
too much
A0131 1 Sample
Add samples or replace
probe does Insufficient sample.
with standard sample
not aspirate Wrong tube type
tube
sample
A0132 0 Re-centrifugate sample,
Clogs in
Clots in sample or remove clots
sample
manually
No on again. Restore
response, or Instruction execute failure on
response error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error page. If this message
A0135 1 Clean sample probe
Sample
with enhanced wash
probe is
Sample probe is solution; disassembly
clogged
clogged by samples the sample probe and
when
remove the foreign
aspirating
matters
A0136 6 Clean sample probe
Sample
with enhanced wash
probe is Foreign matters
solution; disassembly
clogged accumulate in sample
the sample probe and
during probe
remove the foreign
cleaning
matters
6.2.2.3 Sample Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
Home Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Cannot find home
position is not page. If this message
position
found appears for 3 times,
Step missed Belt failure page. If this message
Wrong sensor
Sensor failure page. If this message
status
A0207 15 Sample barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0208 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
A0209 15 Rescan after restoring
Bar code
Scanning too many or failure. If this message
sending
too fast appears for 3 times,
buffer is full
Code Message
on again. Restore
No response,
or response
error
6.2.2.4 R1 Probe Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
No execute
condition
Code Message
Wrong sensor unit power and switch
R1 probe Vertical position failure on
moves sensor failure Utilities-->Daily Maint.
vertically(othe page. If this message
r position) appears for 3 times,
vertically(in page. If this message
reaction disk) appears for 3 times,
A0306 4 R1 probe
cannot find Vertical position
home position sensor failure.
when moving Obstruction exists in
developer
vertically(othe vertical direction
r position)
A0307 11 R1 probe
cannot find Vertical position
developer
vertically(in vertical direction
reaction disk)
A0308 18 R1 probe
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
vertically(othe obstruction and reset
r position)
A0309 18 R1 probe
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
reaction disk)
A0310 4 Lowering
R1 probe is not in
down at If auto reset fails,
vertical home
current restore failure. If failed
position. Current
position is not for 3 times, contact the
allowed(other developer
for lowering down
position)
A0311 11 Lowering
R1 probe is not in
down at If auto reset fails,
vertical home
current restore failure. If failed
position. Current
position is not for 3 times, contact the
for lowering down
reaction disk)
Code Message
R1 probe Rotational position failure on
horizontally(ot page. If this message
her position) appears for 3 times,
moves sensor failure Utilities-->Daily Maint. If
horizontally(in this message appears
reaction disk) for 3 times, contact the
developer
A0314 4 R1 probe
cannot find Rotational position
developer
horizontally(ot horizontal direction
her position)
A0315 11 R1 probe
cannot find Rotational position
developer
horizontally(in horizontal direction
reaction disk)
A0316 18 R1 probe
R1 probe is
collides when If auto reset fails,
obstructed or falls
moving restore failure. Check
when moving
horizontally(ot motor and belt
horizontally
her position)
A0317 11 R1 probe
R1 probe is
collides when If auto reset fails,
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally(in motor and belt
horizontally
reaction disk)
A0318 4 R1 probe is not in
horizontal home If auto reset fails,
Rotating is not
allowed(other
position)
position)
Rotating is not
allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
Code Message
Syringe
sensor is in Syringe sensor error
wrong status
developer
A0321 4 Check if R1 syringe
and cannot restore.
R1 syringe reaches
Syringe Restore failure, or reset
maximum stroke.
cannot find after pushing syringe to
Cannot restore or
home position home position. If this
dispense reagent
problem occurs for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0322 11 R1 probe
does not
No deionized water Add deionized water
detect wash
solution level
A0323 1 R1 probe No R1 or sample or
does not insufficient R1 in
Check if reagent is
detect liquid reaction cuvette when
sufficient. Rerun
level on system dispenses R1
reaction disk or R3
A0324 2 R1 probe
does not No reagent on first
Check if reagent is
detect liquid reagent position.
sufficient. Rerun
level on Reagent is depleted
reagent disk
A0325 1 Insufficient R1
Insufficient R1 Check reagent volume
dispensing
aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0326 1 R1 syringe Restore failure. If failed
R1 syringe aspirates
aspirates too for 3 times, contact the
full abnormally
much developer
R1 syringe dispenses
dispenses too for 3 times, contact the
empty abnormally
much developer
on again. Restore
No response,
or response
error
6.2.2.5 R2 Probe Unit
Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
No execute
condition
Wrong
sensor
on again. Restore
status when
Vertical position failure on
R2 probe
moves
vertically(ot
her position)
vertically(in page. If this message
reaction appears for 3 times,
disk) contact the developer
A0406 5 R2 probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(ot
her position)
Code Message
A0407 11 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Vertical position
position Restore failure. If failed
sensor failure.
when for 3 times, contact the
moving developer
vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0408 18 R2 probe
bumps
when Wrong position.
vertically(ot
her position)
A0409 18 R2 probe
bumps
when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
reaction
disk)
A0410 5 Lowering
down at R2 probe is not in
current vertical home
position is position. Current
not position is not proper
developer
allowed(oth for lowering down
er position)
A0411 11 Lowering
down at
R2 probe is not in
current If auto reset fails,
vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
for lowering down
reaction
disk)
horizontally( page. If this message
other appears for 3 times,
position) contact the developer
horizontally( page. If this message
in reaction appears for 3 times,
disk) contact the developer
Code Message
A0414 5 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Rotational position
sensor failure.
moving developer
horizontal direction
horizontally(
other
position)
A0415 11 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Rotational position
sensor failure.
moving developer
horizontal direction
horizontally(
in reaction
disk)
A0416 18 R2 probe
collides
R2 probe is
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally( motor and belt
horizontally
other
position)
A0417 11 R2 probe
collides
R2 probe is
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally( motor and belt
horizontally
in reaction
disk)
Rotating is horizontal home If auto reset fails,
not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(oth height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
er position) for rotation(highest developer
position)
Rotating is
not
allowed(in
reaction
disk)
position)
A0420 5 Syringe If auto reset fails,
sensor is in restore failure. If failed
Syringe sensor error
wrong for 3 times, contact the
status developer
Code Message
A0421 5 Check if R2 syringe
and cannot restore.
Syringe R2 syringe reaches
Restore failure, or reset
cannot find maximum stroke.
after pushing syringe to
home Cannot restore or
home position. If this
position dispense reagent
problem occurs for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0422 11 R2 probe
does not
detect wash No deionized water Add deionized water
solution
level
A0423 1 R2 probe
does not
No R1 or sample or
detect liquid Check if reagent is
insufficient R1 in
level on sufficient. Rerun
cuvette
reaction
disk
A0424 2 R2 probe
No reagent on
does not
second reagent Check if reagent is
detect liquid
position. Reagent is sufficient. Rerun
level on
depleted
reagent disk
A0425 1 Insufficient
R2 Insufficient R2 Check reagent volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
R2 syringe aspirates
aspirates for 3 times, contact the
full abnormally
too much developer
R2 syringe dispenses
dispenses for 3 times, contact the
empty abnormally
too much developer
response, Instruction execute failure on
or response error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
6.2.2.6 Reagent Disk Unit
Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
No execute
condition
A0504 7 Restore failure. If this
Home
Cannot find home message appears for 3
position is
position times, contact the
not found
developer
Step message appears for 3
Belt failure
missed times, contact the
developer
Wrong
sensor Sensor failure
times, contact the
status
developer
A0507 16 Reagent barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0508 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
Code Message
A0509 16 Rescan after resetting
Bar code mechanically. If this
Scanning too many or
sending message appears for 3
too fast
buffer is full times, contact the
developer
response, Instruction execute failure on
or response error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
6.2.2.7 Reaction Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and
No execute
not reset restore failure on
condition
A0604 11 Reaction Reaction disk home Restore failure. If this
disk cannot position sensor message appears for 3
find home failure. Coder goes times, contact the
position wrong developer
A0605 11 Reaction
Restore failure. If this
disk missed
Motor failure. Belt message appears for 3
step when
failure times, contact the
moving
developer
horizontally
A0606 11 Reaction Restore failure. If this
disk sensor message appears for 3
Sensor failure
is in wrong times, contact the
status developer
A0607 12 Lamp is not turned on, Turn on or reinstall the
or light path is lamp. If problem
Light signal
obstructed, or lamp occurs continuously for
too weak
falls off, or gain error 3 times, contact the
occurs developer
A0608 12 Contact the developer
Light signal Photoelectric gain
and adjust
too strong adjusting error
photoelectric gain
Photoelectric Photoelectric buffer
on again. If this
buffer is overflow, or FIFO
abnormal overflow
times, contact the
developer
A0610 1 After testing, switch off
analyzing unit power
Photoelectric
Photoelectric and switch on again. If
collection and
data error this message appears
conversion failed
developer
response, or Instruction execute failure on
response error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
6.2.2.8 Reagent Mixer Unit
Code
power and restart
included message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
power and restart
Instruction operating software.
Instruction parameter does Then retry this
parameter error not comply with instruction. If this
protocol message appears
the developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Download
Unit is busy and parameters and
No execute
does not reset restore failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily
Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
moves sensor failure
vertically(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
A0706 9 Reagent mixer
cannot find home Vertical position Restore failure. If
position when sensor failure. failed for 3 times,
moving Obstruction exists contact the
vertically(other in vertical direction developer
position)
Code
vertically(in in vertical direction developer
reaction disk)
A0708 9 Reagent mixer is
Lowering down If auto reset fails,
not in vertical
at current restore failure. If
home position.
position is not failed for 3 times,
Current position is
allowed(other contact the
not proper for
position) developer
lowering down
not in vertical
home position.
Current position is
allowed(in contact the
not proper for
reaction disk) developer
lowering down
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
Rotational position
cannot find home Restore failure. If
sensor failure.
position when failed for 3 times,
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(other developer
direction
position)
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(in developer
direction
reaction disk)
Code
not in horizontal If auto reset fails,
Rotating at
home position. restore failure. If
current height is
Current height is failed for 3 times,
not allowed(other
not proper for contact the
position)
rotation(highest developer
position)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
unit power and
switch on again.
Execution result Instruction Restore failure on
is not received in execution is timed Utilities-->Daily
given time out Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Restore failure on
No response, or Instruction execute
Utilities-->Daily
response error error
message appears
the developer
6.2.2.9 Sample Mixer Unit

Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective
Code Actions
A0801 8 Reset analyzing
unit power and
restart operating
Instruction format
software. Then retry
Instruction error. Invalid
this instruction. If
format error information is
this message
included
contact the
developer
Code Actions
A0802 8 Reset analyzing
unit power and
restart operating
Instruction
software. Then retry
Instruction parameter does not
this instruction. If
parameter error comply with
this message
protocol
contact the
developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Download
Unit is busy and parameters and
No execute
does not reset restore failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily
message appears
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
A0806 8 Sample mixer
vertically(other in vertical direction developer
position)
vertically(in in vertical direction developer
reaction disk)
Code Actions
A0808 8 Sample mixer is
not in vertical home
position. Current
position is not
allowed(other contact the
proper for lowering
position) developer
down
not in vertical home
position. Current
position is not
allowed(in contact the
proper for lowering
reaction disk) developer
down
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(other developer
direction
position)
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(in developer
direction
reaction disk)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(other
position)
position)
Code Actions
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
unit power and
switch on again.
Execution result Instruction Restore failure on
is not received in execution is timed Utilities-->Daily
given time out Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Restore failure on
No response, or Instruction execute
Utilities-->Daily
response error error
message appears
the developer
6.2.2.10 Temperature Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction
Then retry this
parameter parameter does not
error comply with protocol
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and restart
Unit is busy. operating software.
No execute Instruction conflicts. Then retry this
condition Instruction buffer is instruction. If this
full message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0904 0 Reset hardware on
Reaction page and restart
Reaction disk
disk reaction disk
temperature
temperature temperature control. If
collection error
is too high this message appears
developer
page and restart
Wash Preheat
reaction disk
solution is temperature
temperature control. If
too hot collection error
this message appears
developer
Reaction page and restart
Reaction disk
disk reaction disk
temperature
collection error
is fluctuated this message appears
developer
Wash page and restart
Preheat
solution reaction disk
temperature
collection error
is fluctuated this message appears
developer
Reaction
page and restart
disk Reaction disk
reaction disk
temperature temperature
temperature control. If
control is collection error
this message appears
switched off
developer
Code Message
Preheat page and restart
Preheat
temperature reaction disk
temperature
control is temperature control. If
collection error
switched off this message appears
developer
Reaction
disk
Reaction disk page and restart
temperature
is not
collection error. temperature control. If
steady in
Heater control error this message appears
specified
time
developer
Wash
solution
Preheat page and restart
temperature
is not
collection error. temperature control. If
steady in
Heater control error this message appears
specified
time
developer
A0912 0 Refrigerator
Fan circuit failed. Contact equipment
fans are
Fan is damaged developer
abnormal
A0913 11 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
Execution
Instruction again. Restore failure on
result is not
execution is timed Utilities-->Daily Maint.
received in
out page. If this message
given time
power and switch on
No
again. Restore failure on
response, Instruction execute
or response error
error
A0915 0 Reaction
disk Reaction disk
temperature temperature sensor Contact equipment
sensor is is disconnected or developer
not damaged
connected
A0916 0 Preheat
Preheat
temperature
temperature sensor Contact equipment
sensor is
is disconnected or developer
not
damaged
connected
Code Message
A0917 0 Pressure
Fan control circuit
machine Contact equipment
error, or fan is
fans developer
damaged
abnormal
6.2.2.11 Wash Unit

Code Message

power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction
Wash unit is busy or Then retry this
execution
abnormal instruction. If this
is timed out
times, contact the
developer
A1005 11 Wash unit If auto reset fails,
cannot restore failure. Remove
reach obstruction and reset. If
vertical direction
home problem remains,
position contact the developer
Wash unit
cannot Obstruction exists in
obstruction and reset. If
leave home vertical direction
problem remains,
position
Code Message
A1007 11 Remove foreign

matters, and restore
Wash unit bumps. failure on
Wash unit
Obstruction exists. Utilities-->Daily Maint.
bumps
Mechanical failure page. If problem
remains, contact the
developer
A1008 17 High-conce
Liquid level sensor is
ntration Empty
abnormal. Waste
waste high-concentration
buffer is not emptied
buffer is too waste buffer
in time
high
A1009 17 Low-conce
Liquid level sensor is
ntration Empty
abnormal. Waste
waste low-concentration waste
buffer is not emptied
buffer is too buffer
in time
high
A1010 17 Waste pump
abnormal. Liquid
Waste
sensor abnormal.
buffer level Troubleshoot failed part
External sewer
is too high
blocked. Tubing fell
off
A1011 17 Liquid sensor
abnormal. Inlet valve
Troubleshoot failed part.
abnormal. Water
Water tank Execute "System
treatment system
level is too Prime" and select
abnormal. Water
low "Prime Water
supply unit abnormal.
Tank/Probes/Mixers"
10psig pressure
abnormal
A1012 17 Liquid sensor
abnormal. Inlet valve
Water tank abnormal. Water
level is too treatment system Troubleshoot failed part
high abnormal. Water
supply unit abnormal.
Main filter abnormal
A1013 10 Valve abnormal. No Troubleshoot failed part.
Diluted diluted wash solution. Execute "System
wash tank Water tank level too Prime" and select
is too low low. Liquid level "Prime Diluted Wash
sensor abnormal Solution Tank"
A1014 0 Valve abnormal. No
Concentrat concentrated wash
ed wash solution. Water tank
Execute "Concentrated
tank is too level too low. Liquid
Wash Solution Refilling"
low level sensor
abnormal
Code Message

Pump/valv Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Pump failure. Valve
e goes page. If this message
failure
wrong appears for 3 times,
A1016 12 Air pump/valve
abnormal. Container Identify failed part.
leakage. Vacuum Check if vacuum level is
Vacuum
filter/one-way valve normal by reading
pressure is
clogged. Connector pressure gauge on
abnormal
leakage. Water hydropneumatic
accumulation in assembly panel
vacuum container
abnormal. High
pressure protection of
Identify failed part.
pressure switch
Check if 25psig is
25psig started. Protection
normal by reading
pressure is valve abnormal.
pressure gauge on
abnormal Container leakage.
hydropneumatic
Oil
assembly panel
separator/one-way
valve clogged.
Connector leakage
abnormal. High
pressure switch
started. Protection
Check if 10psig is
10psig valve abnormal.
normal by reading
pressure is Container leakage.
pressure gauge on
abnormal Oil
hydropneumatic
separator/one-way
assembly panel
valve clogged.
Connector leakage.
Precision regulation
valve abnormal
abnormal. High
pressure switch
started. Protection
Check if 5psig is normal
5psig valve abnormal.
by reading pressure
pressure is Container leakage.
gauge on
abnormal Oil
hydropneumatic
separator/one-way
assembly panel
valve clogged.
Connector leakage.
Precision regulation
valve abnormal
Code Message
A1020 12 Wash
Interior wash valve
solution
abnormal. Water tank
flow for
level too low. 10psig Troubleshoot failed part
probe
pressure abnormal.
interior is
Other valve abnormal
abnormal
A1021 12 Wash
solution
flow for Exterior wash valve
Troubleshoot failed part
probe/bar abnormal
exterior is
abnormal
A1022 12 Wash
probe/tubing/check
Cuvette valve clogged.
Troubleshoot failed part
overflow Vacuum pressure
abnormal. Wash unit
abnormal
A1023 12 Wash probe clogged.
No wash Connector leakage.
solution is 10psig pressure
dispensed abnormal. Water tank Troubleshoot failed part
into level too low. Preheat
cuvettes module abnormal.
Loose connector
A1024 12 Tubing pressure not
released completely.
Air pump
High pressure Troubleshoot failed part
cannot start
protection of pressure
switch started
A1025 12 Dilution
Pressure of diluted
cannot
wash solution tank is
proceed Troubleshoot failed part
not released
successfull
completely
y
A1026 12 Water
accumulate Waste buffer level too
s in reagent high. Waste tubing
Arrange waste tubing
disk and clogged
wash well
A1027 0 Check the inlet tubing
Water tank
Water flow is weak, or connection. If error
cannot be
floater goes wrong remain, contact the
filled
developer
A1028 11 Pressure
Sensor is damaged
sensor Contact the developer
or disconnected
check error
A1029 11 Pressure
sensor Sensor goes wrong
Contact the developer
calibration during maintenance
error
Code Message

power and switch on
Execution again. Restore failure
result is not Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
received in is timed out Maint. page. If this
given time message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
No
again. Restore failure
response,
Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
or
error Maint. page. If this
response
error
times, contact the
developer
A1032 10 Diluted Valve goes wrong. No Troubleshoot failed part.
wash diluted wash solution. Execute "System
solution B Distilled water is not Prime" and select
is not enough. Liquid-level "Prime Diluted Wash
enough sensor goes wrong Solution Tank"
A1033 0 Valve goes wrong. No
Concentrat Troubleshoot failed part.
concentrated wash
ed wash Execute "System
solution. Distilled
solution B Prime" and select
water is not enough.
is not "Concentrated Wash
Liquid-level sensor
enough Solution Refilling"
goes wrong
A1034 0 Shut down the analyzer.
High-conce High-concentration
Check and empty the
ntration waste is full, or
high-concentration
waste high-concentration
waste tank. If error
bucket is waste bucket sensor
remains, contact the
too high goes wrong
developer
A1035 12 Shut down the analyzer.
Vacuum
Liquid builds up in Empty the vacuum tank.
container is
vacuum container If error remains, contact
too high
the developer
A1036 12 Pressure of
Turn off air pump and
25psig
Air pump is blocked turn on again. If the
gauge is
and cannot work error remains, shut
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
25psig
gauge is Tubing are leaking or Shut down the analyzer
less than not connected and check the fluidic
20psig in properly tubing connection
standby
status
Code Message
Adjust the protection
25psign
Protection valve is valve to increase
gauge is
not adjusted correctly pressure to
within
25psig(0.172MPa)
27-35psig
A1039 12 Shut down the analyzer,
Pressure of
clean the tubing, check
25psign Protection valve and
the protection valve,
gauge is one-way valve are
pressure switch, power
greater blocked. Tubing is
supply and power cord.
than 35psig clogged or broken
Then start up the
at any time
analyzer
A1040 12 Vacuum
pressure is
greater
than
down the analyzer
-0.5psig
A1041 12 Vacuum
pressure is
greater Tubing are leaking or Shut down the analyzer
than not connected and check the fluidic
-10psig in properly tubing connection
standby
status
10psig
gauge is
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
10psig
standby
status
A1044 12 Pressure of Shut down the analyzer,
Inlet valve cannot be
10psign check the water supply
turned off. Water tank
gauge is and floater of water
overflow. Pressure
greater tank. Replace the inlet
too high
than 13psig valve if necessary
5psig
gauge is
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
5psig
standby
status
Code Message
A1047 12 Result
error:
Diluted
wash
Not enough pressure Contact the developer
solution
tank
emptying
failed
A1048 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing clogged Troubleshoot the tubing
pressure
releasing
failed
A1049 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing leaking Troubleshoot the tubing
pressure
establishin
g failed
A1050 12 Result
error:
Diluted
Pressure cannot
wash Restart the vacuum and
reach the expected
solution pressure gauges
value
tank
priming
failed
A1051 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing clogged Troubleshoot the tubing
vacuum
releasing
failed
A1052 12 Result
error:
System
vacuum
establishin
g failed
A1053 12 Result
error:
10psig
pressure
establishin
g failed
A1054 12 Result
error: 5psig
pressure Tubing leaking Troubleshoot the tubing
establishin
g failed
6.2.2.12 ISE Unit
Code Message
A1101 14 ISE unit Reconnect. Reset ISE
ISE unit connection
handshake unit. Power on ISE unit
error
is abnormal again
A1102 14 ISE unit is ISE unit is executing Wait a moment, and
busy other instruction re-execute ISE instruction
A1103 14 Power switched off.
Communication
Reconnect to power.
failed. Serial cable
ISE unit Reconnect serial cable.
damaged or
does not Perform ISE initialization.
unconnected. Module
respond Contact the developer to
connector damaged.
replace board
Board elements
damaged
A1104 14 Reinstall sensor. Replace
Electrode installation calibrant B and rerun, if
incorrect. Calibrator still low, replace calibrant
expired. Electrode A and rerun. Replace
Na+
degenerated. Bubbles failed sensor and rerun.
electrode
in reference Reinstall electrode,
slope is out
electrode. Reference eliminate bubbles and
of standard
electrode damaged. calibrate. Replace
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Na+
Module or tubing electrode and rerun.
temperature above 37 Monitor temperature, if too
high, relocate equipment
K+
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or K+ electrode
Module or tubing and rerun. Monitor
temperature above 37 temperature, if too high,
relocate equipment
Cl-
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Cl- electrode
relocate equipment
A1107 14 Li+ Electrode installation Reinstall sensor. Replace
electrode incorrect. Calibrator calibrant B and rerun, if
slope is out expired. Electrode still low, replace calibrant
Code Message
of standard degenerated. Bubbles A and rerun. Replace
range in reference failed sensor and rerun.
electrode. Reference Reinstall electrode,
electrode damaged. eliminate bubbles and
Electrodes interfered. calibrate. Replace
Module or tubing reference or Li+ electrode
temperature above 37 and rerun. Monitor
temperature, if too high,
relocate equipment
A1108 14 Replace electrode and
Na+ Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
electrode degenerated. Noise noise. If board element is
noise error spike interference damaged, replace the
board
K+ Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
board
Cl- Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
board
Li+ Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
board
A1112 14 Replace reference
Reference electrode electrode and rerun.
Na+, K+,
degenerated. Check for electrical noise.
Cl-, Li+
Environment Check unit grounding. If
electrodes
interfered by electrical board element is
noise error
noise spike damaged, replace the
board
A1113 14 Replace failed electrode
Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
Na+
degenerated. New channel and recalibrate.
electrode
electrode or new In case of new electrode,
drift
calibrant A is used drift may occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
K+
electrode
drift
A1115 14 Electrode Replace failed electrode
Cl- and run. Check calibrant A
degenerated. New
electrode channel and recalibrate.
electrode or new
drift In case of new electrode,
calibrant A is used
drift may occur, wait for 15
Code Message
Li+
electrode
drift
Reference electrode
electrode and rerun.
Na+, K+, degenerated.
Check for electrical noise.
Cl-, Li+ Environmental electric
If board element is
electrodes pulse. New electrode
damaged, replace the
drift or new calibrant A is
board. Check calibrant A
used
channel and recalibrate
Na+ Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
electrode degenerated. New channel and recalibrate.
voltage electrode or new In case of new electrode,
overflow calibrant A is used drift may occur, wait for 15
K+ Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
Cl- Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
Li+ Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
Reference electrode
Na+, K+, electrode and rerun.
degenerated.
Cl-, Li+ Check for electrical noise.
Environmental electric
electrodes If board element is
pulse. New electrode
voltage damaged, replace the
or new calibrant A is
overflow board. Check calibrator A
used
channel and recalibrate
A1123 3 If sample is less than 70µl,
Insufficient sample.
increase sample volume.
Sample not aspirated
Fill sufficient sample in
Air in to measurement
tube. In case of wrong
sample chamber. Tubing
electrode installation,
aged. Pump tubing
install again. Replace the
clogged or too long
tubing
A1124 14 Air in Calibrant A depleted. Check spring/sealing ring.
Code Message
calibrant A Tubing unconnected. Ensure all electrodes/O
Calibrant A pump rings are correct. Launch
failure. Tubing a wash procedure.
clogged/cracked/bent. Disassemble the unit and
Fibrin and salt in reinstall sensor. Replace
electrode tubing. bubble detector, waste
Bubble detector pump, or calibrant A and
failure. Waste pump recalibrate.
failure Reconnect/replace tubing.
Check electrical
connection. Replace
pump housing, motor, or
tubing
A1125 14 In case of wrong electrode
installation, check spring
and sealing ring. Ensure
Air in calibrant B.
all electrodes and O rings
Fibrin and salt in
are installed correctly.
Air in electrode tubing.
Press Clean on water
calibrant B Bubble detector
treatment system to wash.
failure. Waste pump
Disassemble this unit and
failure
wash and reinstall sensor.
Replace bubble detector.
Replace waste pump.
A1126 14 In case of wrong electrode
installation, check spring
and sealing ring. Ensure
Air in calibrant B and
all electrodes and O rings
A. Fibrin and salt in
are installed correctly.
Air in electrode tubing.
Press Clean on water
cleaner Bubble detector
treatment system to wash.
failure. Waste pump
Disassemble this unit and
failure
wash and reinstall sensor.
Replace bubble detector.
Replace waste pump.
A1127 14 Calibrator A/B
No fluid in Replace reagent package.
depleted. No sample
tubing Check the tubing
or cleaning solution
A1128 14 Instruction Instruction format
Please contact the
execute error, or parameter
developer
error error
A1129 14 Calibrations ISE unit cannot store
Recalibrate
saving error calibration results
A1130 14 Bubble
Bubble detector is Replace the bubble
detector
damaged detector
failure
Code Message
A1131 14
Calibrate repeatedly. If
Electrode slope is out problem remains, reinstall
Calibration
of range during failed electrode. If
failed
calibration problem still remains,
replace the electrode
A1132 14 If maintaining, send

instruction again, if
Instruction Instruction format testing, rerun. Otherwise
execute error. Parameter error. restart operation unit and
error No execute condition analyzing unit. If this
problem remains, contact
the developer

power and switch on
Execution
again. Reset mechanically
result is not Instruction execution
on Utilities-->Alignment
received in is timed out
given time

power and switch on
No
again. Reset mechanically
response, Instruction execute
on Utilities-->Alignment
or response error
error

Na+
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Na+
Module or tubing electrode and rerun.
temperature above 37 Monitor temperature, if too
high, relocate equipment
K+
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or K+ electrode
relocate equipment
Code Message
Cl-
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Cl- electrode
relocate equipment
Li+
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Li+ electrode
relocate equipment
6.2.2.13 Others
Code Message
A1401 11 Undefined Generated error Upgrade the operating

failure code is out of software, or contact the
defined range service engineer
7 Data Alarms
7.1 Data Alarms

Data alarm is a kind of flag for test results and indicates the error that occurs during
measurement and may influence the test result. User should check if the test result is
reliable and acceptable according to the flag. Please note that data alarm is not
necessarily failure but will certainly affect the test result. Therefore, you should pay
much attention to such alarms, which are listed in the table below.
Table 7-1 Data Alarm Information

Alarm Message Flag Probable Causes Corrective Actions
CBK Cuvette degenerated.
Cuvette blank Wash again. Replace
Wash solution failure.
abnormal cuvette or light source
Light source failure
Insufficient SMP Not enough sample for Increase sample volume

sample one run and rerun
Insufficient RGN All like reagents reach Increase reagent volume or

reagent the warning count replace reagent, then rerun
ABS Check sample for foreign

matters. Check reagent
Absorbance out
Absorbance is over 3A placement and quality.
of range
Check cuvette for dirt.
Check photometric system
PRO Dilute sample and rerun.

Prozone check Prozone check limit is
Check if limit settings are
error exceeded
reasonable
R1 blank out of RBK Reagent goes wrong. Replace reagent and rerun,
range Cuvette is dirty or reset limits
7 Data Alarms 7-1

BOE Substrate depleted
Substrate when using kinetic
Dilute sample and rerun.
depleted method or fixed-time
method
NLN Measuring points in

both kinetic read Rerun, or rerun after diluting
No linear interval
window and substrate sample
limit are less than 3
EXP Not error, but test result

Enzyme linearity
calculated by extending /
extension
enzyme linearity range
ENC For enzyme linearity

extension, measuring
No calculation Rerun, or rerun after diluting
points in substrate limit
interval sample
are less than 2 within
lagged period
LIN Reaction data does not Rerun, or rerun after diluting

Nonlinear
meet linearity criteria sample
> Calculated
Above
concentration exceeds Rerun, or rerun after diluting
concentration
high limit of linearity sample
high limit
range
< Calculated
Below
concentration exceeds Rerun, or rerun after diluting
concentration low
low limit of linearity sample
limit
range
^ Sample concentration
Above reference Neglect or rerun after
exceeds high limit of
high limit diluting sample
reference range
v Sample concentration
Below reference Neglect or rerun after
exceeds low limit of
low limit increasing sample volume
reference range
MBK During blank

Blank calibration calibration, absorbance
Recalibrate
out of range at end of reaction is out
of given range
DUP Difference between

Calibration
max. and min response
repeatability Recalibrate
of each calibrator
exceeds limit
exceeds defined limit
SEN Difference between

Calibration absorbance of
sensitivity strongest and weakest Recalibrate
exceeds limit calibrators exceeds
defined limit
CSD Calculated calibration

Calibration curve
curve SD exceeds Recalibrate
SD error
defined limit
7-2 7 Data Alarms

Coefficient FAC Difference between
difference limit current K and last K Recalibrate
exceeds limit exceeds defined limit
RRN Sample response

Response out of
exceeds most Recalibrate
range
concentrated calibrator
Calibration MON
Nonlinear calibration
monotonicity Recalibrate
curve is not monotone
error
COV When calculating

nonlinear calibration
Calibration result
result, if no qualified
does not Recalibrate
result is obtained after
converge
1000 iterations,
calibration is failed
CIE Cannot calculate final

result by using current Check calculation formula.
Calculation error
formula and Rerun participated tests
participated Test Result
RCE When calculating

Response response, data is
Rerun
calculation error incomplete or dividend
is 0
CCE Cannot calculate final

Concentration Select other calibration rule
result by using default
calculation error or parameters, then rerun
calibration parameters
Result already EDT

A test result is edited /
edited
Result already CAL A test result is corrected

/
corrected using defined formula
ECL Cannot calculate, or

Correction Reset correction
abnormality occurs
abnormal parameters
during calculation
Real-time QC 1 control value exceeds

1-2S
1-2S warning ±2 standard deviations
Real-time QC
1 control value exceeds
1-3S out of 1-3S
±3 standard deviations
control
Real-time QC 2 consecutive control

2-2S out of 2-2S values exceeds ±2
control standard deviations

R-4S out of R-4S values exceeds 4
control standard deviations

4-1S out of 4-1S values exceeds 1
control standard deviation
7 Data Alarms 7-3

10-X out of 10-X values for one level lie
control on one side of the mean
7-4 7 Data Alarms

8 Calculation Methods
8.1 Reaction Types

The system provides three reaction types for measurement:
Endpoint
Fixed-time
Kinetic
8.1.1 Endpoint
The endpoint or, more correctly, equilibrium method, is most ideal. The reaction
reaches equilibrium after a period of time. Since the equilibrium constant is very large,
it can be considered that all substrates (analytes) have changed into products, and
absorbance of the reaction liquid does not change any more. The absorbance
change is directly proportional to the analytes concentration.
The endpoint reaction is largely insensitive to minor changes in such condition

changes as amount of enzyme, pH value and temperature, provided the changes are
not significant enough to affect the reaction time.
8.1.1.1 Single-reagent
Figure8-1 Single-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
8 Calculation Methods 8-1

As shown in Figure8-1, R1 is the time when reagent is dispensed and S when sample
is dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the absorbance
reading is taken. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.
On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:

Reaction time: L and 1≤N≤P<L≤M≤80; M-4≤L; L>13
M
Reagent blank time: P-4≤N or N=P=0;
N and P
N, P ≠ 13;
N>12 or P≤12
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai,

If L=M Enter two Ms. One measuring point is applied. The
reaction absorbance is the absorbance at M, that is, Ai＝
AM.
If L=M-1 Enter M-1 and M. Two measuring points are applied. The
reaction absorbance is the average of absorbance at M-1
AM + AM −1
and M, that is, Ai＝ .
2
If L=M-2 Enter M-2 and M. Three measuring points are applied.
The reaction absorbance is the remaining one when the
maximum and minimum absorbance is removed.
If L=M-3 or L=M-4 Enter M-3 and M or M-4 and M. Four or five measuring
points are applied. The reaction absorbance is the
average of remaining absorbance when the maximum
and minimum ones are removed.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab,

Follow the Ai calculation steps stated above.
Reaction response calculation: R = Ai − k1 Ab

VR1
k1 =
If P≤12, then VR1 + VS ; if N>12, then k1=1; if N=P=0, then k1=0.
VR1
Where, k1 = is a volume correction factor for single-reagent analysis.
VR1 + VS
VR1 and VS are volumes of first reagent and sample. K1Ab is reagent blank
correction value.
Reagent blank absorbance can be subtracted from the reaction absorbance but
sample blank cannot. To correct the response with sample blank, you should request
sample blank separately, whose response is Rsb = Ai − k1 Ab . The response after
being corrected by sample blank is R = R − RSb .
'
8-2 8 Calculation Methods

8.1.1.2 Double-reagent
Figure8-2 Double-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure8-2, R1, S and R2 are the time when first reagent, sample and
second reagent are respectively dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches
equilibrium and the absorbance reading is taken. The sample blank is tested during N
and P.

Reaction time: [L][M] 14≤N≤P<L≤M≤80; M-4≤L; L>42
Reagent blank time: P-4≤N or N=P=0;
[N][P]
N>42 or P≤42
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai, follow the relevant steps stated in 8.1.1.1.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab, follow the relevant steps stated in
8.1.1.1.
Calculate the reaction response using the following equation:
R = Ai − k2 Ab
VR1 + VS
If P≤42, then k2 = ; if N>42, then k2=1; if N=P=0, then k2=0.
VR1 + VS + VR 2
VR1 + VS
Where, K2Ab is sample blank correction value. k2 = is a volume
VR1 + VS + VR 2
correction factor for double-reagent analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first
reagent, sample and second reagent.
8.1.1.3 Triple- or Quadruple-reagent

Figure8-3 Triple-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve

Figure8-4 Quadruple-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure8-3 and Figure8-4, R1, S, R2, R3 and R4 are the time when first
reagent, sample, second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent are respectively
dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the absorbance reading
is taken. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

Reaction time: L and Triple-reagent analysis: 43 ≤ N ≤ P<L ≤ M ≤ 170 and
M M-4≤L; L>92
Quadruple-reagent analysis: 93≤N≤P<L≤M≤170 and
M-4≤L; L>132
Reagent blank time: Triple-reagent analysis: P-4≤N or N=P=0; N,P ≠ 91, 92;
N and P N>90 or P≤90
Quadruple-reagent analysis: P-4≤N or N=P=0; N>132 or
P≤132
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai, follow the relevant steps stated in 8.1.1.1.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab, follow the relevant steps stated in
8.1.1.1.
Reaction response calculation:
Triple-reagent R = Ai − k 3 Ab
analysis
VR1 + VS + VR2
If P≤90, then k3 = ; if N>90, then
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3
k3=1; if N=P=0, then k3=0.
VR1 + VS + VR2
k3 = is a volume correction factor
for triple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2 and VR3 are
volumes of first reagent, sample, second reagent and third
reagent.
Quadruple-reagent R = Ai − k 4 Ab
analysis
If P≤132, then k4 = ; if
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3 + VR4
N>132, then k4=1; if N=P=0, then k4=0.

k4 = is a volume correction
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3 + VR4
factor for quadruple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2, VR3
and VR4 are volumes of first reagent, sample, second
reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent.
8.1.2 Fixed-time
For the fixed-time reaction method, namely, first-order kinetic method or initial rate
method, the reaction velocity (v) within a specific period, is directly proportional to the
substrate concentration [S], that is, v=k[S]. As the substrate is consumed
continuously, the reaction velocity becomes smaller and smaller, and so does the
absorbance change rate. It takes much time for such a reaction to reach equilibrium.
Theoretically, the absorbance reading can be taken at any time. The reaction can,
however, become steady only after a lag because it is complicated at the beginning
and there are miscellaneous reactions due to complex serum compositions.
For any first order reaction, the substrate concentration [S] at given time since
reaction starts is obtained by the following formula:
[S ] = [S 0 ]× e − kt
Where,
[S0] - Initial substrate concentration

e - Base of the natural log
k - Velocity constant
The change in substrate concentration ∆[S] over a fixed time interval, t1 to t 2 , is
related to [S0] by the following equation:
− ∆[ S ]
[ S 0] = − kt1 − kt 2
e −e
That is, within a fixed time interval, the change in substrate concentration is directly
proportional to its initial concentration. This is the general property of first-order
reactions. Within this interval, absorbance change is directly proportional to the
analytes concentration.
The fixed-time method is available in single-interval and double-interval according to

input mode of measuring points. Sample blank, namely, the absorbance change at
two points within the incubation time, is subtracted from the reaction absorbance in
double-interval reaction.
Substrate depletion can be checked in fixed-time reaction, and corresponding flag will
be marked in case of substrate depletion.

8.1.2.1 Single-reagent
Figure8-5 Single-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure8-5, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at L and M.

Reaction time: L and 14 ≤L<M ≤80;
M
Reagent blank time: Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
N and P

A − AL
R= M
tM − tL
8.1.2.2 Double-reagent
Figure8-6 Double-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are
respectively taken at L and M. The reagent blank is tested at N and P.

Reaction time: L and M 43 ≤L<M ≤80;
Single-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank N=P=0
[N][P]
Double-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank 14≤N<P≤42
[N][P]

Single-interval A − AL
fixed-time R= M ;
tM − tL
Double-interval AM − AL A − AN
fixed-time R= − k2 P
tM − tL tP − tN
VR1 + VS
Where, k2 = is a volume correction factor for double-reagent
VR1 + VS + VR 2
analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first reagent, sample and second reagent.
8.1.2.3 Triple- or Quadruple-reagent

Figure8-7 Triple-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
Figure8-8 Quadruple-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
dispensed. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at L and M. The reagent
blank is tested during N and P
On the Basics window of the Test page

Triple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time[L][M] 92≤L<M≤170,
[N][P]
[N][P]
Quadruple analysis, enter:
Reaction time[L][M] 134≤L<M≤171

[N][P]
[N][P]
Triple-reagent analysis
For single-interval fixed-time, AM − AL
R=
tM − tL
For double-interval fixed-time, AM − AL A − AN
R= − k3 P
tM − tL tP − tN
Quadruple-reagent analysis
For single-interval fixed-time, AM − AL
R=
tM − tL
For double-interval fixed-time AM − AL A − AN
reaction, R= − k4 P
tM − tL tP − tN
VR1 + VS + VR2
Where, k3 = is a volume correction factor for
triple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2 and VR3 are volumes of first reagent,
sample, second reagent and third reagent.
k4 = is a volume correction factor for
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3 + VR4
quadruple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2, VR3 and VR4 are volumes of first
reagent, sample, second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent.
8.1.3 Kinetic
For the kinetic method, namely, zero-order kinetic or continuous-monitoring method,
the reaction velocity is not related to substrate concentration and remains constant
during the reaction process. As a result, for a given wavelength, the absorbance of
the analytes changes evenly, and the change rate (∆A/min) is directly proportional to
the activity or concentration of the analytes. The kinetic method is usually used to
measure enzyme activity.
In fact, it is impossible for the substrate concentration to be high enough, and the
reaction will be no longer a zero-order reaction when the substrate is consumed to a
certain degree. Therefore, the theory only stands within certain period. In addition,
the reaction can become steady only after a certain period of time, because the
reaction is complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to
complex serum compositions.
In Kinetic reaction, the concentration or activity is obtained according to absorbance

change among specified measuring points.
The Kinetic method is available in single-interval Kinetic and double-interval Kinetic

according to input mode of measuring points.

8.1.3.1 Calculation Flow of Kinetic Method
Figure8-9 Calculation Flow in Kinetic Reaction
Determine linearity range
Calculate response with least

square method
Judge the linearity
8.1.3.2 Determination of Linearity Range

The absorbance linearity range should be determined based on the substrate
depletion limit.
You should determine the linearity range within the reaction time other than the
reagent blank period.
Figure8-10 Linearity Range Determination of Kinetic Method (Increased Reaction)
Enter measuring point L-M
Enter substrate depletion

limit?
No
Yes
AL+2≤Substrate depletion No The alarm “NLN”(no linear interval)

limit occurs
Yes
AM≤Substrate depletion Search for M’from end point M.

limit AM’≤Substrate depletion limit
NO
Yes
Linearity range is L-M Linearity range is L-M’

Figure8-11 Linearity Range of Kinetic Method (Increased Reaction)
Substrate Depletion Limit
R linearity range
Measuring point range
Figure8-10 shows the linearity range determination process for increased reaction. In
decreased reaction, the “≤” in Figure8-10 should be changed into “≥”.
The number of measuring points (N) in substrate limit should be counted.

If N>=3, The linearity range includes all measuring points from
reaction start point to substrate depletion point. Otherwise
“NLN” alarm message is displayed.
If N=0 or N=1, No calculation is performed and only alarm message is
displayed.
If N=2 or N=3, An alarm message is displayed. Two or three measuring
points are applied to calculate the reaction response.
8.1.3.3 Response Calculation

Single-reagent
Figure8-12 Single-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure8-12, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken during L and M.

Reaction time: L and M 14≤L<M ≤80;
Reagent blank time: N Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
and P

R=⊿ALM
⊿ is the absorbance change rate per minute (slope of reaction curve) during L and
M and calculated by the least squares method.
Double-reagent
Figure8-13 Double-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken
during L and M. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

Reaction time: L and M 43≤L≤M≤80
[N][P]
[N][P]

R=⊿ALM－K2⊿ANP
Triple- or Quadruple-reagent
Figure8-14 Triple-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve

Figure8-15 Quadruple-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken during L and M. The reagent blank is
tested during N and P.
On the Basics window of the Test page,

Triple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time: L and M 92≤L<M≤170;
[N][P]
[N][P]
Quadruple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time: L and M 133≤L<M≤170;
[N][P]
[N][P]
Triple-reagent analysis
For single-interval Kinetic reaction, For single-interval Kinetic reaction,
For double-interval Kinetic reaction, For double-interval Kinetic reaction,
Quadruple-reagent analysis
For single-interval Kinetic reaction, For single-interval Kinetic reaction,
For double-interval Kinetic reaction, For double-interval Kinetic reaction,
8.1.3.4 Linearity Check
∆A f − ∆Ab
Linearity= × 100 < Linearity Limit
∆Au ,v
Where, ∆A f , ∆Ab and ∆Au ,v are the absorbance change rates at the beginning
and end of reaction, and of all measuring points. These three values are calculated
based on the number of measuring points within the main read time.

When N>9, ∆A f is the absorbance change rate of first 6
measuring points, ∆Ab of last 6 measuring
points, and ∆Au ,v of all measuring points.
When 4 ≤ N ≤ 8 , ∆A f is the absorbance change rate of first 3
measuring points, ∆Ab of last 3 measuring
points, and ∆Au ,v of all measuring points.
When N ≤ 3 Linearity is not checked.
When Linearity is not checked.

∆A f − ∆Ab ≤ 0.006A/minute
or ∆Au ,v ≤ 0.006A/minute,
8.1.3.5 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension

Figure8-16 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension
Flex Read Time

Main Read Time
Absorbance
Substrate Depletion Mark
Substrate Depleted
Read Time
During the high-activity enzyme test, the substrate may be depleted quickly and the
reaction curve will appear obviously nonlinear (a smooth curve). If measurement is
performed by the ordinary procedure, the “No linear interval” alarm will be triggered,
reminding user to rerun the test after diluting the sample. This will more or less bring
troubles to user.
The system provides the enzyme linearity range extension function, which is
introduced as follows:
When the number of measuring points(N) within the main read time is less than 2, the
enzyme linearity range extension can be implemented.
The maximum reaction rate(⊿Amax) is calculated based on all measuring points

which include that within the lag time and then considered as the response of the
sample. If less than 2 measuring points during the lag time experience substrate
depletion, no result will be calculated and “ENC(No calculation interval)” is flagged.
⊿Amax is calculated as follows:

If the reaction start time is t1, reaction time is tL-tM, then t1-tL is the lag time. If the
valid measuring points(N<2) within tL-tM are too few to calculate the response, the
reaction rate can be calculated based on all measuring points during t1-tM using the
formula: ⊿A＝(Ai＋1-Ai)/(ti＋1－ti). (i＝1, 2…M)The maximum ⊿A, namely ⊿Amax, is
taken as the response of the sample. Therefore, the enzyme linearity range is
extended via the lag time.
8.2 Prozone Check

During reaction of antigen and antibody, the amount of generated insoluble
compound is closely related to the proportion between antigen and antibody. When
antigen and antibody is proportioned properly, maximum amount of insoluble
compound is generated, that is, least light is passed and absorbance is the highest.
Otherwise, amount of insoluble compound is reduced, more light is passed, and
absorbance is decreased. Therefore, very high concentration samples may produce
insoluble compound equivalent to low samples and thus an incorrect result can be
reported. The antigen-antibody dose reaction is shown in Figure8-17.
Prozone check is used for Endpoint analysis only.
Figure8-17 Antigen-antibody Dose Reaction Curve
Prozone Postzone
(antibody excess) Equivalent Zone (antigen excess)
Response(R)
Concentration of Antigen(C)
8.2.1 Antigen Addition

Antigen excess can be tested by further addition of antigen. When enough antibodies
are provided, the antigen reacts with them in reaction medium and forms into stable
compound particles, thus producing dispersed light, which increases dynamically with
compound amount increased and reaction time extended (antibody excess). If
antibody keeps excess in specified period, it will continue to react with further added
antigen, and reaction will increase accordingly. If antigen is excess before further
addition, the reaction will decrease. The reaction curve for further addition of antigen
is shown in the figure below.

Figure8-18 Reaction Curve for Further Addition of Antigen
Reaction Time(point)
Enter the following prozone check parameters:
Measuring points: Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4;
Prozone limit: PC;
Absorbance low limit for prozone check: ABS
When Antigen is selected, first edit box of ABS field and the Q3/Q4 fields on the
Basics window of the Test page are not available.
170≥q2≥102>q1≥Reaction end point. 102 is the last measuring point before sample
is added again.
Sample PC＝Aq2-k×Aq1,
Where, k is the volume correction factor.
For single-reagent test: k＝(VR1+VS)/(VR1+2VS);
For double-reagent test: k＝(VR1+VS+VR2)/( VR1+2VS+VR2).
If PC<PCM in increased reaction or PC>PCM in decreased reaction, “PRO” flag is

marked.
8.2.2 Reaction Rate Method

Figure8-19 Antibody Excess Reaction Curve

Figure8-20 Antigen excess reaction curve
The reaction rate method is based on the specified time, in which antibody excess
reaction can reach equilibrium (Figure8-19) but antigen excess reaction cannot
(Figure8-20). Prozone check is performed using the following parameters:
Measuring points: Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4

Prozone limit: PC;
Absorbance low limit for prozone check: ABS
Aq 4 − Aq 3
q 4 − q3
Sample PC = . If PC>PCM, “PRO” flag is marked.
Aq 2 − Aq1
q 2 − q1
Enter measuring points as follows:
For single-reagent 14<=q1<q2<q3<q4<=Reaction end point<=80.

test,
For 43<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 80.
double-reagent
test,
For triple-reagent 92<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 170;
test,
For 133<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 170.
quadruple-reagent
test,
Prozone check will not be performed if:
(1) End point absorbance A is less than absorbance low limit in increased reaction
or greater than that in decreased reaction;
(2) Absolute value of response R is greater than RCMAX (absolute value of
response of most-concentrated calibrator).

8.3 Serum Index
8.3.1 What is Serum Index
Figure8-21 Absorption Spectrum of Serum Reactant
Absorbance
Wavelength
Figure8-21 shows three absorption spectrums of serum samples.
Curve 1 is of the ideal serum without any disturbance.

Curve 2 is of the serum with chromophores like icterus, hemolysis and lipemia.
Curve 3 is of the serum that contains small bubbles or suspending particles.
Small bubbles and suspending particles, which are not sensitive to wavelength and
may only cause the absorption spectrum to translate increasingly (Curve 3), can be
removed using double wavelength method. However, the disturbance such as icterus,
hemolysis and lipemia, which are very sensitive to wavelength and cause the
absorption spectrum to be complex (Figure8-22), cannot be eliminated with double
wavelength method, thus leading to false results.

Figure8-22 Absorption Spectrum of Icterus, Hemolysis and Lipemia
Absorbance
Lipemia
Icterus Hemolysis
Wavelength
Serum index is the level of hemolysis, icterus and lipemia in serum samples, and can
be employed to judge whether the sample can be used or a sample blank is needed.
8.3.2 Calculation of Serum Index

Calculation of serum index for single-reagent test is shown below.
Sample: Serum;
Reagent: Physiological saline. The average of absorbance at 4th -8th measuring

points after sample dispensing should be used to calculate serum index.
You should enter the serum factors (A, B, C, D, E, F) and thresholds for lipemia,
hemolysis and icterus.
Figure8-23 Settings of Serum Factors and Thresholds
The serum index is calculated as follows:
Six wavelengths (n=450, 505, 570, 605, 670, 700) are selected to determine the
serum index.

Calculation of turbidity index (lipemia): Primary wavelength: 600, secondary
wavelength: 700
AL = A600 − A700 , turbidity index: L = 1 / C × AL ;
Calculation of hemolysis index: Primary wavelength: 570, secondary wavelength:

605
AH = A570 − A605 , hemolysis index: H = 1 / A × ( AH − B × AL ) ;
Calculation of icterus index: Primary wavelength: 450, secondary wavelength:
505
AI = A450 − A505 , icterus index: I = 1 / D × ( AI − E × AH − F × AL ) .
Determination of reference values for serum factors (A, B, C, D, E, F)
Three reference solutions of lipemia, hemolysis and icterus are configured with concentration
of CL, CH, and CI respectively. Six serum index wavelengths provided by BS series are applied
to determine the serum factors.
C, B, F are calculated based on lipemia criteria:
A670 − A700 A570 − A605 A450 − A505

C= , B= , F= ;
CL A670 − A700 A670 − A700
A and E are calculated based on hemolysis criteria:
A570 − A605 A450 − A505

A= , E= ;
CH A570 − A605
D is calculated based on icterus criteria:
A450 − A505
D= .
CI

For Your Notes

Appendix A System Specifications
A.1 Technical Specifications

Throughput: 400 tests/hour(chemical tests), or 560 tests/hour with ISE unit (3
analytes), or 640 tests/hour with ISE unit (4 analytes)
Number of Simultaneous Measurements: 77 single-reagent tests/38

double-reagent tests/25 triple-reagent tests/19 quadruple-reagent tests; also 3
or 4 ISE tests with the ISE module
Analysis principle: Colorimetry, Turbidity, ISE method
Analytical method: Endpoint, Kinetic, Fixed-time; Double-reagent and

double-wavelength
Sample disk: 90 positions. 30 positions respectively for inner, middle and outer
circles.
Sample volume: 2µl-45µl, with increment of 0.1µl
Dead volume of sample: 200µl
Sample probe: Capable of detecting liquid level, clots and obstructions, and
tracking liquid level
Sample probe washing: Inside and outside of the probe are washed
Emergent sample processing: Emergent samples can be analyzed any time with
highest priority.
Capable of rerunning sample after prediluting it
Reagent disk: 80 positions. 40 positions respectively for inner and outer circles.
Reagent volume: R1 volume: 150µl-350µl, with increment of 1µl
R2 volume: 20µl-350µl, with increment of 1µl
Dead volume of reagent: 1ml
Reagent probe: Capable of detecting liquid level and obstructions, and tracking
liquid level
Reagent probe washing: Inside and outside of the probe are washed
Mixers: Respectively stir samples and R2
Appendix A System Specifications A-1

Reaction disk: 90 cuvette positions
Reaction temperature: 37℃
Reaction cuvette: 5mm×5mm×30mm(L×D×H), optical path of 5mm,

semi-permanent, capacity of 750µl
Reaction liquid volume: 150-360µl
Photometric system: Static fiber transmission, and reversed optics of

holographic concave flat-field gratings
Light source: 12V, Tungsten-halogen lamp, 50W
Wavelength: 12 wavelengths, which are 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm,

546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm
Measuring period: 9 seconds
Deionized water consumption: 20L/H
A.2 Power Requirements

Power supply: 220-240V~, 50Hz, 220/230V~, 60Hz; or 110/115V~, 60Hz
Power consumption: 1500VA
A.3 EMC
The equipment complies with the emission and immunity requirement description in
this part of the IEC 61326-1:2005/EN 61326-1:2006 and IEC 61326-2-6:2005/EN
61326-2-6:2006.
A.4 Specifications of PC and Printer

CPU: P4 3.0G or above
Hard disk: 80G or above
Memory: 512M or above
Operating system: Windows 2000(Professional SP4 or above), Windows

XP(Home/Professional SP1 or above)
Interfaces: Serial port, network interface, USB and parallel port
Resolution: 1024×768
Printer: Ink jet printer, laser printer(black and white), stylus printer
A-2 Appendix A System Specifications

A.5 Specifications of Water Supply Module and
Drainage Module
Water Supply Module:
Dimensions: 305.5mm X 312.6mm X 243.5mm (L×D×H)

Weight: 11kg (including the filter, which weighs 1.0kg)
Drainage Module:
Dimensions: 438.9mm X 312.6mm X 288mm (L×D×H)

Weight: 11.2kg (including the filter, which weighs 1.0kg)
A.6 Environmental Requirements

Temperature: 15℃-30℃
Humidity: 35%RH-80%RH, without condensation
Atmospheric pressure: 800hPa -1,060hPa
Above-sea-level height: -400m - 2000m
A.7 Dimension and Weight

Dimension: 1180mm X 700mm X 1145mm (L×D×H)
Weight: 250kg
A.8 Input/Output Devices

PC keyboard
PC mouse
Printer
Display
Fixed bar code reader or hand-held bar code reader
A.9 Other Specifications

Noise: ≤ 75dB
Fuse: 250VAC T6.3A, 250VAC T10A, 350VAC T1.0A, 250VAC T10A, 350VAC
T1.0A
A.10 Communication Interface

RS-232: Connecting analyzing unit to PC
Network port: Connecting PC to LAN or Internet
USB port: Connecting PC to printer or hand-held bar code reader
Appendix A System Specifications A-3

For Your Notes
A-4 Appendix A System Specifications

Appendix B Template Modifying
Software
The Template Modifying Software is affiliated with the Operating Software and used
to create or edit print templates, which illustrate the contents and format of patient
reports.
The Template Modifying Software can be started separately or together with the
Operating Software. To start the Template Modifying Software, select the Edit button
on the Print page of the operating software.
The following sections introduce the Template Modifying Software by menus and
toolbars.
B.1 Main Screen

The following figure shows the main screen of the Template Modifying Software.
Title
Menu
Common
Toolbar Property
Window
Editing Area
Report
Window
Drawing
Toolbar
Status Bar
B.1.1 File(F)
The File menu is used to create, save, import/export and print out the templates.
Select File on upper-left corner of the main screen. The File menu is displayed.
Appendix B Template Modifying Software B-1

The following table explains the menu in detail.
Option Description
New Select New to create a template. The type of the template is
determined by the report that is currently selected on the report
window.
You can also use the shortcut key Ctrl+N instead.
After changing the currently-displayed template, select New to
display the following dialog box.
Select Yes to save the changes and create a template.

Select No to cancel the changes and create a template.
Select Cancel to abort creating and return to the previous
screen.
Save Select Save to save the newly-created template or the changes to a
template.
You can also use the shortcut key Ctrl+S instead.
To save a new template, you should define the template name:
B-2 Appendix B Template Modifying Software

Option Description
Enter the name in the edit box.
Select OK to save the template and add the name to the
template list on the report window.
Select Cancel to abort saving and return to the previous screen.
If a template with the same name already exists, the following dialog
box pops up.
Select Yes to overwrite the template.

Select No to cancel saving and return to the previous screen.
Save As Save the current template with another name.
If a template with the same name already exists, a dialog box
appears to ask for your confirmation.
Delete Select a template and select Delete. The following dialog box pops
up.
Select Yes to delete the template and return to the main screen.
Select No to abort the deletion.
NOTE
A deleted template cannot be recovered. If you are not
sure whether to delete the template, you can first export it
for backup.
Import Select this option to load a template from an .mdb file and add the
template name to the report window on lower-right corner of the main
screen.
If the current template is newly created or changed, a prompt
appears asking you for confirmation when another template is
imported.
If imported successfully, the template is displayed in the editing area

Option Description
and added to the report window.
Export Select this option to export the current template to an .mdb file.
The .mdb file may have a name different from the template.
Print Select this option to print the current template.
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+P instead.
NOTE
The Template Modifying Software can only print out
templates other than actual reports, which should be
printed on the Operating Software.
Preview Select this option to view the template exactly as it will be printed out.
The main screen will be hidden when you preview a template.
The tool bar on the Preview window is as follows.
Previous Page Next Page Zoom In Zoom Out Exit
Home Page Go To Last Page Print
If the template has more than one page, and are

available.
: Go to the first page.
: Go to the previous page.
: Go to the specified page.

: Go to the next page.
: Go to the last page.
: Select to expand the template view among 25%, 50%, 75%

and 100%. The default is 100%.
: Select to shrink the template view.
: Print out the template. It is equivalent to the Print option in

the File menu.
: Select to exit the preview window and return to the

template.

Option Description
Exit Select this option to close the Template Modifying Software.
You can use the shortcut key Alt+F4 instead.
If the template is changed, the following dialog box pops up.
Select Yes to save the changes and exit the software.

Select No to exit the software without saving the changes.
Select Cancel to abort exiting and return to the previous screen.
B.1.2 Edit(E)
The Edit menu provides the functions like cut, copy, paste and delete. Select Edit on
the menu bar of the main screen. The Edit menu is displayed.
NOTE
The control(s) you have cut or copied can only be pasted on the
current Template Modifying Software rather than another one or other
software.
Option Description
Cut Select this option to copy and delete single or multiple controls.
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+X instead.
This option is available only when a control(s) is selected.
Copy Select this option to copy single or multiple controls.
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+C instead.

Option Description
Paste Select this option to paste the controls that are previously cut or
copied at the same place as where the controls are from.
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+P instead.
This option is available only when a control(s) is cut or copied.
Delete Select this option to delete single or multiple controls
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+D instead.
B.1.3 View(V)
The View menu is used to enable or disable the toolbars and to set up the displaying
proportion. Select View on the menu bar of the main screen. The View menu is
displayed.
Option Description
Common Enable or disable the common toolbar.
Tool
Draw Tool Enable or disable the draw toolbar.
Property Enable or disable the property window.
Window
Report Enable or disable the report window.
Window
Status Bar Enable or disable the status bar.
25%-200 Select a proportion to display the template. The default is 100%.

%
NOTE
You are recommended to select 100% when saving a
template.

B.1.4 Insert(I)
The Insert menu is used to create controls in the editing page. Select Insert on the
menu bar of the main screen. The Insert menu is displayed.
Only one option on the Insert menu can be selected simultaneously.
Option Description
Select
Select this option to change the mouse pointer to a .
When the mouse pointer changes to a , you can select single or

multiple controls in the editing area.
NOTE
Selecting a control while holding the Ctrl key copies the
control.
Line Select this option to insert a line in the editing area. The mouse
pointer changes into a +. Click once in the editing area and drag the
mouse to draw a line.
Rectangle Select this option to insert a rectangle in the editing area. The
mouse pointer changes into a +. Click once in the editing area and
drag the mouse to draw a rectangle.
Label Select this option to insert a label in the editing area. The mouse
mouse to draw a label.
Label is a type of text control and the contents on a label will not
change when printed.
Text Select this option to insert a text control in the editing area. The
mouse pointer changes into a +. Click once in the editing area and
drag the mouse to create a text.
The contents in a text control will be replaced by the actual test data
when printed.
Title Select this option to insert a title in the editing area. The mouse
mouse to create a title.
Title is a type of text control. The “%s” will be replaced by a hospital
name when printed. Please note “%s” is added by user and not
produced automatically.

Option Description
Image Select this option to insert an image in the editing area. The mouse
mouse to create an image.
The image on the template is for illustration only and will be
replaced by corresponding curve graph when printed.
B.1.5 Format(M)
The Format menu is used to arrange the controls on a template. Select Format on
the menu bar of the main screen. The Format menu is displayed.
Option Description
Left Align the specified controls with the left of the lastly-selected
control.
Right Align the specified controls with the right of the lastly-selected
control.
Top Align the specified controls with the top side of the lastly-selected
control.
Bottom Align the specified controls with the bottom side of the
lastly-selected control.
Center H Align one or multiple controls to the horizontal center of current
template.
Center V Align one or multiple controls to the vertical center of current
template.
Even Space Arrange three or more controls with same space horizontally.
H
Even Space Arrange three or more controls with same space vertically.
V
Same Width Adjust the specified controls to the same width as the
Same Height Adjust the specified controls to the same height as the

Option Description
Same Size Adjust the specified controls to the same width and height as the
B.1.6 Set(S)
The Set menu only includes an option, Print ID. See the figure below.
Select Print ID. The Set Print ID dialog box is displayed. You can enable or disable
the print fields and view the corresponding ID of each field.
B.1.7 Help(H)
Select Help on the menu bar of the main screen. The Help menu is displayed.
Option Description
About Select this option to view the version information of the
MakePrintTemplate template modifying software.

B.2 Common Tools
The common toolbar provides the shortcut buttons that enables you to perform an
operation quickly.
The following table shows the correspondence between the shortcut buttons and
menu options.
Button Menu Option

New File/New
Save File/Save
Save As File/Save As
Import File/Import
Export File/Export
Delete File/Delete
Print File/Print
Preview File/Preview
Cut Edit/Cut
Copy Edit/Copy
Paste Edit/Paste
Delete Edit/Delete
Zoom View/25%-200%
Property View/Property Window
Rpt List View/Report Window
Print ID Set/Print ID
B.3 Draw Tools

The draw toolbar provides the shortcut buttons that enables you to create and draw
controls quickly.
The following table shows the correspondence between the shortcut buttons and
menu options.
Button Menu Option

Insert/Select

Button Menu Option
Insert/Line
Insert/Rectangle
Insert/Label
Insert/Text
Insert/Title
Insert/Image
Format/Left
Format/Right
Format/Top
Format/Bottom
Format/Center H
Format/Center V
Format/Even Space H
Format/Even Space V
Format/Same Width
Format/Same Height
Format/Same Size
B.4 Property Window

The property window enables you to view and edit the properties of the selected
control. If no control is selected in the window, the properties of the current template
are displayed.

B.4.1 Page
When no control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the current
template, such as paper, print type, etc.
The following table explains the template properties in detail.
Parameter Description
Paper Define the paper type of the template. There are 9 common types
available.
If the paper width and height you defined are beyond the
specified range, Custom is displayed in the Paper field.
Paper Width Define the width of the template.
Paper Height Define the height of the template.
Grid Point Enable or disable grid points on the template.
Print Type Select a print mode between Paginal and Serial.

With Paginal, you can print out the reports on several pages with
predefined paper type. This mode applies to all printers.
With Serial, you can print out the reports on one page with the
paper type changed accordingly. This mode applies to stylus
printer only.
Combination Enable or disable combining two reports on one page. The
Type default is no combination.
B.4.2 Line
When a line control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the line.

The following table explains the line properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the line. The ID is 2.
Start X Set the X-coordinate value of the start point.
NOTE
The control coordinate originates from the upper-left
corner of the editing area, from which the X
axis(positive) is extended horizontally to the right and
the Y axis(positive) vertically to the bottom. The unit
is mm.
Start Y Set the Y-coordinate value of the start point.
End X Set the X-coordinate value of the end point.
End Y Set the Y-coordinate value of the end point.
Line Width Set the width of the line. The unit is mm.
Group No. A group gathers multiple controls that will be used frequently on the
template. e.g. a line of controls constitutes a group. The group No.
is 0 if not defined.
Line Color Set the color of the line.
Print Enable or disable printing the line on actual reports.
B.4.3 Rectangle
When a rectangle control is selected, the property window shows the properties of
the rectangle.

The following table explains the rectangle properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the line. The ID is 1.
Start X Set the X-coordinate value of the start point (upper-left corner).
Start Y Set the Y-coordinate value of the start point (upper-left corner).
Width Set the width of the rectangle.
Height Set the height of the rectangle.
Frame Width Set the frame width of the rectangle.
Group No. A group gathers multiple controls that will be used frequently on
the template. e.g. a line of controls constitutes a group. The group
No. is 0 if not defined.
Frame Color Set the color of the frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the rectangle on actual reports.
B.4.4 Label
When a label control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the
label.

The following table explains the label properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the label. The ID is 4.
Text Set the text on the label. It will be printed unchanged on actual
reports.
Width Set the width of the label.
Height Set the height of the label.
Bk Color Set the background color of the label.
Font Set the font of the label text.
Text Place Set the aligning mode of label text. It includes Left, Center and
Right.
Show Frame Enable and disable printing frame.
Frame Width Set the width of the label frame.
Frame Color Set the color of the label frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the label on actual reports.

B.4.5 Text
When a text control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the text.
The following table explains the text properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the text. The default is 0 and means unknown ID.
Print ID indicates the meaning of the text. Correct printout can be
ensured only when print ID is set properly.
Name Set the contents to be displayed on the text control. It varies from
different IDs.
Text Set the contents displayed on the text control. It will be replaced
by actual data when printed.
Show Detail Set the text as table data.
NOTE
Only the text that not only is enabled in Show
Details field but also has a group No. is table data.
Width Set the width of the text.
Height Set the height of the text.
the template. e.g. a line of controls constitutes a group. The
group No. is 0 if not defined.

Text Type Reserved parameter. The default is 0.
Bk Color Set the background color of the text.
Font Set the font of the text.
Text Place Set the aligning mode of the text. It includes Left, Center and
Right.
Frame Width Set the width of the text frame.
Frame Color Set the color of the label frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the text on actual reports.
B.4.6 Title
When a title control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the title.
The following table explains the title properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the title. The ID is 5.
Text Set the contents to be displayed on the title. “%s” will be replaced
by a hospital name and can be displayed in any place of the title.
Width Set the width of the title.

Height Set the height of the title.
Bk Color Set the background color of the title.
Font Set the font of the title text.
Text Place Set the aligning mode of title text. It includes Left, Center and
Right.
Frame Width Set the width of the title frame.
Frame Color Set the color of the title frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the title on actual reports.
B.4.7 Image
When an image control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the
image.
The following table explains the image properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the image. The ID is 3.
Width Set the width of the image.
Height Set the height of the image.
Print Enable or disable printing the image on actual reports.

B.5 Report Window
The report window locates on the lower-right corner of the main screen and shows all
the templates of a selected report type.
Report Type
Template List

For Your Notes

Appendix C Supplies
To ensure personal safety and system performance, use only supplies manufactured
or recommended by our company. Contact our customer service department or your
local distributor for details.
Part Name Part Number Location Description

50W BA30-10-06365 Lamp Regularly-replaced
tungsten-halogen housing part
lamp
Replace it when:
L9389‘Gilway’
(light source) 1) It serves for over
1000h; or
2) The system
reminds you to
replace.
Plunger assembly BA34-10-63720 Sample Regularly-replaced
(Kloehn 100µL) syringe part
Replace it when:
1) It serves for 3
months; or
2) It runs for
100,000 times; or
3) It is apparently
damaged.
Plunger assembly 0040-10-32316 Reagent Regularly-replaced
(Kloehn 500µL) syringe part
Replace it when:
1) It serves for 3
months; or
2) It runs for
100,000 times; or
3) It is apparently
damaged.
Sample syringe 0040-10-32303 Connecting Regularly-replaced
gasket part between part
the sample
Replace it when the
syringe and
sample syringe is
the T-piece
reinstalled for 2 to 3
times.
Reagent syringe 0040-10-32303 Connecting Regularly-replaced
gasket part between part
the reagent
Replace it when the
syringe and
reagent syringe is
the T-piece
reinstalled for 2 to 3
times.
Appendix C Supplies C-1

Reagent Regularly-replaced
probe arm part
Replace it when:
Reagent probe
BA40-30-61524 1) It serves for 1
assembly
year; or
2) It is damaged or
bent.
Sample Regularly-replaced
probe arm part
Replace it when:
Sample probe
BA40-30-61525 1) It serves for 1
assembly
year; or
2) It is damaged or
bent.
Sample probe 0040-10-32307 Nut on the Regularly-replaced
gasket sample part
probe
Replace it when:
1) The sample
probe is reinstalled
for 2 to 3 times; or
2) The sample
probe is replaced
with a new one.
Reagent probe 0040-10-32307 Nut on the Regularly-replaced
gasket reagent part
probe
Replace it when:
1) The sample
probe is reinstalled
for 2 to 3 times; or
2) The reagent
probe is replaced
with a new one.
Mixer BA31-20-41651 Mixer arm Regularly-replaced
part
Replace it when it is
damaged.
A4 paper 0150-10-00381 Printer Consumable
Reaction cuvette BA40-20-61438 Reaction Replace it every
disk month or as
needed.
Deionized water Water supply Replace it every 6
BA40-30-61993
filter assembly module months.
Inner-circle Reagent disk Consumable
BA40-20-73060
bottle(40ml)
Inner-circle Reagent disk Consumable
BA40-20-73061
bottle(62ml)
C-2 Appendix C Supplies

Outer-circle Reagent disk Consumable
BA40-20-73058
bottle(20ml)
Outer-circle Reagent disk Consumable
BA40-20-73059
bottle(40ml)
K+ electrode BA34-10-63641 ISE unit Consumable
(optional) (optional)
Na+ electrode BA34-10-63642 ISE unit Consumable
Cl- electrode BA34-10-63639 ISE unit Consumable
Li+ electrode BA34-10-63644 ISE unit Consumable
Reference BA34-10-63640 ISE unit Consumable
electrode (optional)
(optional)
Spacer electrode BA34-10-63643 ISE unit Consumable
Cleaning Solution BA34-10-63645 ISE unit Consumable
Kit (optional) (optional)
Reagent Module BA34-10-63673 ISE unit Consumable
Urine Dilution BA34-10-63671 ISE unit Consumable
ISE control BA34-10-63669 ISE unit Consumable
(optional)
Appendix C Supplies C-3

For Your Notes
C-4 Appendix C Supplies

Appendix D Index
A C
Absorbance4-62, 4-78, 6-7, 6-8, 7-1, Calculation interval ................4-101

8-15, 8-16
Calibration.......1-20, 3-6, 3-7, 4-39,
Acid wash solution .... 1-5, 1-9, 3-3, 4-40, 4-40, 4-41, 4-42, 4-43,
4-7, 5-2, 5-8, 5-9, 5-11, 6-12, 4-44, 4-45, 4-46, 4-47, 4-48,
6-13 4-57, 4-81, 4-82, 4-109, 6-6, 6-7,
6-8, 6-53, 7-2, 7-3
Aging test ................................ 1-17
Calibration curve.. 4-40, 4-41, 4-42,
Air bubble........................5-3, 5-43 4-43, 4-81, 4-82, 4-109, 7-2, 7-3
Air filter ................................... 5-30 Calibration data ......................4-109
Air screen................................. 5-30 Calibration parameter.... 4-26, 4-28,
4-41, 4-43, 4-44, 4-45, 4-46,
Alarm message area............... 1-21 4-51, 4-54, 4-81, 6-6, 7-3
Alignment .......4-116, 4-122, 4-123, Calibration parameters .. 4-44, 4-45,
6-53 4-46, 4-109
Alkaline wash solution1-5, 1-6, 1-9, Calibration reaction curve .......4-41,
1-10, 3-3, 4-7, 5-2, 5-8, 5-9, 5-11, 4-109
6-12, 6-13
Calibration rule .............. 4-40, 4-41
Altitude height ........................... 2-2
Calibrator1-4, 4-7, 4-40, 4-44, 4-47,
Analyzing unit .. 1-2, 5-14, 6-4, 6-5, 4-82, 4-83, 4-84, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8,
6-14 6-49, 6-52, 6-53, 6-54
Antigen addition ...................... 4-79 Carryover ......3-6, 4-74, 4-88, 4-89,
4-90, 4-91
Antigen excess........ 6-8, 8-14, 8-16
Centrifugal tube......................... 1-5
B
Characteristic ..... 10, 4-5, 4-8, 4-11,
Background 1-17, B-15, B-17, B-18
4-19
Ball valve................................... 5-4
Charge statistics .....................4-109
Bidirectional .......................... 4-114
Charges ................. 4-68, 4-72, 4-73
Biohazard waste disposal5, 5-7, 5-8,
Chemistry analyzer ........1, 4, 7, 1-1
5-10, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14, 5-18,
5-19, 5-20, 5-22, 5-23, 5-33, Codabar ..................................... 1-7
5-38, 5-40, 5-41, 5-42, 5-44,
5-45 Code93 ...................................... 1-7
Blank response......................... 4-82 Concentrated wash solution .....1-13
Blood bag ................................ 4-11 Concentration level ........ 4-83, 4-85
Blood collecting tube................. 1-5 Continuous-monitoring method 8-8
Blood type ...........4-11, 4-20, 4-104
Appendix D Index D-1

Control... 1-4, 4-7, 4-50, 4-84, 4-85, Endpoint 4-76, 4-77, 4-79, 8-1, 8-3,
4-86, 4-102, 6-7, 6-8 8-4, 8-14, A-1
Control valve ........................... 1-12 Equilibrium 5-44, 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4,
8-5, 8-16
Correlation coefficient ............. 4-82
Error logs ...............................4-110
Cost statistics ......................... 4-109
Ethanol .............. 6, 9, 5-2, 5-8, 5-29
Cotton swab 5-18, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21,
5-22, 5-23, 5-42 Expiration date .......................4-113
Cross-headed screwdriver.......... 5-2 F
CSF........................................ 7, 1-1 Failed part ..............................4-122
Cuvette blank....................1-17, 7-1 Fiber bundle .............................1-16
D Filter....................... 4-63, 5-55, C-2
Daily .. 3-8, 4-49, 4-52, 4-57, 4-109, Fixed-time 4-76, 4-77, 8-1, 8-5, 8-6,
4-116, 4-117, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-8, 8-7, A-1
5-10, 5-11, 5-16, 5-17, 5-19,
5-20, 5-21, 5-24, 5-28, 5-35, Floater switch...........................5-30
5-39, 5-41, 5-43, 5-46, 5-50
Function buttons area ...............1-20
Daily QC................................ 4-109
G
Day to day...... 3-8, 4-49, 4-54, 4-55
Gasket ... 5-27, 5-33, 5-37, C-1, C-2
Day-to-day QC ...................... 4-109
Graphic statistics ............ 4-46, 4-47
Deionized water 1-3, 1-9, 1-15, 3-3,
4-90, 4-91, 5-8, 5-10, 5-11, 5-27, Ground voltage.......................... 2-2
5-28, 5-35, 5-39, 6-20, 6-26,
H
6-30
Hand-held bar code reader4-8, 4-32,
Deionized water tank ................. 3-3
A-3, A-4
Demographics.......................... 4-11
Heater............................. 1-13, 5-45
Dictionary4-5, 4-8, 4-11, 4-12, 4-71,
Hemolysis ....9, 4-5, 4-8, 4-11, 8-18
4-72, 4-77, 4-93, 4-95, 4-98,
4-102, 4-103 Hex wrench ............................... 5-2
Dilution ratio ..................1-17, 4-61 High limit ..4-70, 4-80, 4-82, 4-100,
7-2
Dilution tank A ........................ 1-12
High-concentration waste 1-3, 1-15,
Dilution tank B ........................ 1-12
3-3, 3-13
Distilled water .. 1-5, 3-3, 4-7, 4-83,
High-concentration waste bucket
4-86, 6-13
..................................... 3-3, 3-13
Double-reagent ..8-3, 8-6, 8-11, A-1
High-concentration waste tank.1-12
Drain hole .................................. 2-3
Holographic concave flat-field
E gratings.................................1-16
Electrode... 4-48, 4-125, 6-49, 6-50, Hydrochloric acid............... 1-8, 5-2

6-50, 6-51, 6-52, 6-52, 6-53,
Hydropneumatic assembly1-2, 1-13
6-54
Hydropneumatic drawer...........5-24
Electromagnetic noise................... 8
D-2 Appendix D Index

I Low limit...4-70, 4-80, 4-82, 4-100,
7-2, 8-15, 8-16
Icterus .............. 4-5, 4-8, 4-11, 8-18
Low-concentration waste 1-3, 1-15,
Indication area ....................... 1-20 2-3, 3-3, 5-4
Inlet tubing..........................2-3, 2-4 Low-concentration waste tank .1-12
Inlet valve .................................. 3-3 Luminous flux ..........................1-17
inner-circle......................... 1-8, C-2 Lunar month...........................4-122
Inpatient..........................4-11, 4-20 M
Intercept................ 4-29, 4-46, 4-77 Main screen......................1-19, B-1
Ion selective electrode ............. 1-17 Measurement range ..................1-16
ISE analyte.... 1-6, 4-48, 4-69, 4-70, Measurement statistics ...........4-109
4-74, 4-92, 4-97, 4-98, 6-4
Measuring point ... 4-79, 4-101, 7-2,
ISE calibration ....................... 4-109 8-2, 8-5, 8-8, 8-10, 8-12, 8-13,
8-15, 8-16, 8-18
ISE cleaning solution.. 1-4, 3-3, 4-7
Microtube.................................. 1-5
ISE module .............................. 1-17
Mixer..... 1-2, 1-15, 1-16, 3-4, 6-34,
ITF ..................................1-7, 4-112 6-36, C-2
K Mixer arm....1-15, 5-10, 5-11, 5-21,
5-23, 5-42, 5-43
Kinetic . 4-77, 4-78, 4-101, 6-8, 8-1,
8-8, 8-9, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, A-1 Mixer assembly ......................... 1-2
L Mixing position .............. 1-13, 1-14
Lamp....... 4, 5-28, 5-44, 5-46, 6-13, MRN ..................... 4-11, 4-20, 4-73
6-33, C-1
Multi-point linear .....................4-81
Lamp housing .......................... 5-29
N
Laser ................3, 5, 1-7, 1-11, 5-11
Needle tube ............................... 5-2
Leap year ............................... 4-122
Non-leap year.........................4-122
Light source ..............1-16, 7-1, A-2
Normal reaction curve............4-110
Linear interval ....................... 4-101
O
Linearity limit...............4-78, 4-101
Off-system test ...... 4-21, 4-94, 4-96
Linearity range..... 4-9, 4-78, 4-101,
6-8, 7-2, 8-9, 8-10, 8-12 One-point linear .......................4-81
Lipemia............ 4-5, 4-8, 4-11, 8-18 Operating procedure.................. 3-1
LIS host ... 3-6, 3-8, 3-11, 3-12, 4-9, Operating software.. 1-19, 3-4, B-1,
4-12, 4-13, 4-14, 4-18, 4-26, B-4
4-44, 4-46, 4-52, 4-54, 4-56,
4-111, 4-113, 4-114, 4-115, 6-4, Operation unit .................. 1-19, 6-5
6-9, 6-11
Operator area .........................1-20
Log off ........................4-127, 4-128
Optical path......................1-14, A-2
Lot No........ 4-32, 4-83, 4-85, 4-113

outer-circle......................... 1-8, C-3 4-54, 4-55, 4-56, 4-57, 4-66,
4-74, 4-84, 4-97, 4-98, 4-109,
Outpatient .......................4-11, 4-20 6-7, 6-8, 7-3, 7-4
Output unit............................... 1-19 QC graph............... 4-52, 4-53, 4-55
P QC reaction curve4-51, 4-53, 4-109
Package insert.....10, 3-5, 3-6, 4-75, QC rule. 3-6, 4-49, 4-51, 4-53, 4-55
4-78
Quadruple-reagent8-3, 8-4, 8-7, 8-8,
Password.. 3-5, 4-106, 4-107, 4-128 8-11, 8-12
Patient report1-2, 4-21, 4-94, 4-108, Qualitative..4-87, 4-94, 4-96, 4-104
B-1
Quantitative..............................4-94
Photodiode array...................... 1-16
R
Photometer assembly................. 1-2
R1 probe......4-89, 4-90, 5-50, 5-51,
PID..................................4-11, 4-20 5-53, 5-56, 6-3, 6-24, 6-25, 6-26
Plastic tube................................. 1-5 R2 probe......4-89, 4-90, 5-50, 5-51,
5-53, 5-56, 6-3, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29,
Plunger button ................5-27, 5-28 6-30
Plunger guide cap ... 5-3, 5-27, 5-28 Rate check................................4-79
Plunger tip ......................5-27, 5-28 Rated hours ..... 4-120, 4-124, 4-125
Power consumption .................. A-2 Rated tests .................. 4-124, 4-125
Power socket.......................2-2, 3-2 Reaction curve...... 4-18, 4-23, 4-24,
4-26, 4-38, 4-39, 4-41, 4-42,
Pressure gauge ..................1-12, 5-5
4-44, 4-51, 4-53, 4-59, 4-61,
Primary wavelength........4-62, 4-76 4-62, 4-63, 4-68, 4-109, 4-110,
4-123, 8-1, 8-3, 8-4, 8-6, 8-7,
Probe arm ....1-5, 1-9, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 8-14, 8-15
5-10, 5-19, 5-20, 5-22, 5-31,
5-33, 5-34, 5-35, 5-36, 5-37, Reaction cuvette....... 1-2, 1-6, 1-10,
5-38, 5-39, 5-40, 5-41, C-2 1-12, 1-13, 1-15, 1-16, 4-88,
4-89, 5-16, 5-46, 5-51, 5-56, 6-3,
Probe rotor ...... 1-5, 1-9, 5-22, 5-23, 6-26
5-53
Reaction data............................4-63
Probe tip .. 3-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-12, 5-13,
5-18, 5-19, 5-21, 5-22, 5-26, Reaction disk1-13, 1-14, 4-56, 4-66,
5-31, 5-33, 5-34, 5-35, 5-36, 4-67, 6-32
5-37, 5-38, 5-39, 5-40, 5-41,
Reaction disk assembly ............. 1-2
5-44
Reaction liquid ........ 1-15, 1-16, 8-1
Profile ........ 4-74, 4-91, 4-92, 4-112
Reaction rate method ...............8-15
Protected ................................ 4-128
Reaction temperature .......1-14, A-2
Prozone check. 4-79, 6-8, 7-1, 8-14,
8-16 Reaction time .........................4-102
Pump....................4-117, 6-52, 6-52 Reaction volume ......................1-14
Q Reagent bar code reader ..1-11, 5-11
QC ..... 8, 1-20, 3-6, 3-8, 4-48, 4-49,
4-50, 4-50, 4-51, 4-52, 4-53,

Reagent blank ...... 3-10, 4-30, 4-36, Sample bar code reader ............. 1-7
4-37, 4-38, 4-39, 4-109
Sample blank............................. 4-8
Reagent blank data ................ 4-109
Sample compartment 5-7, 5-8, 5-12,
Reagent blank reaction curve.. 4-39, 5-13, 5-19, 5-22, 5-31, 5-35,
4-109 5-40, 5-41
Reagent compartment ......5-9, 5-10, Sample disk. 1-4, 2-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9,
5-13, 5-14, 5-20, 5-22, 5-36, 3-10, 3-11, 4-56, 4-57, 4-58,
5-39, 5-51 4-61, 5-12, 6-21
Reagent disk ... 1-8, 2-6, 4-56, 4-64, Sample dispenser....................... 1-5
5-13, 6-31
Sample dispensing position.....1-13,
Reagent dispensing position ... 1-13, 1-14
1-14
Sample ID .....4-5, 4-12, 4-19, 4-21,
Reagent inventory.. 3-6, 4-33, 4-34, 4-70, 4-73, 4-112
4-108
Sample mixer 1-16, 3-4, 5-50, 5-51,
Reagent mixer1-16, 3-4, 5-50, 5-51, 5-53, 5-56, 6-3, 6-37, 6-38
5-53, 5-56, 6-3, 6-34, 6-35
Sample probe ....3-4, 5-3, 5-7, 5-18,
Reagent order........ 4-31, 4-34, 4-35 5-21, 5-30, 5-31, 5-33, 5-34,
5-35, 5-36, 5-38, 5-39, 5-40,
Reagent probe 5-3, 5-36, 5-38, 5-41 6-17
Reagent statistics ................... 4-108 Sample reaction curve ... 4-61, 4-62,
4-63
Reagent syringe ........................ C-1
Sample statistics.....................4-109
Real-time ...... 3-8, 4-49, 4-50, 4-57,
4-109, 6-7, 6-8, 7-3, 7-4 Sample syringe.......................... 1-6
Real-time QC.. 4-109, 6-7, 6-8, 7-3, Sample type.4-5, 4-11, 4-98, 4-103,
7-4 4-112
Reference range .... 3-5, 4-79, 4-94, Sample volume............... 4-75, 4-76
4-96, 4-98
Sampling ... 1-4, 1-6, 4-3, 4-5, 4-66,
Refrigerator........ 1-8, 1-9, 2-7, 3-12 4-99, 5-27, 5-33, 5-37, 6-3
Relative humidity ...................... 2-3 Scroll bar..................................1-23
Release...... i, 4-30, 4-33, 4-59, 4-60 Secondary wavelength .. 4-62, 4-76,
8-19
Replicate4-8, 4-18, 4-24, 4-25, 4-26,
4-41 Self-pay .......................... 4-11, 4-20
Resolution.........................1-16, 6-5 Sender ................... 4-68, 4-71, 4-72
Response... 4-78, 4-81, 4-82, 4-101, Sensitivity ................................4-81
4-114, 6-7, 6-11, 6-16, 6-21, 6-23,
6-26, 6-30, 6-32, 6-33, 6-36, Serial port.................................. 6-6
6-39, 6-41, 6-53, 7-2, 7-3, 8-2,
8-3, 8-4, 8-6, 8-7, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11, Serum ...........4-25, 4-86, 8-17, 8-18
8-12, 8-16
Serum index .......... 4-86, 8-17, 8-18
Reversed optics........................ 1-16
Shortcut buttons area ............1-20
S
Silencer ....................................5-30
Safety symbols.............................. 1
Single-reagent ........... 8-1, 8-6, 8-10

Siphon tube.............................. 5-30 Tweezers ................................... 5-2
Slider ............................1-23, 4-100 Twin-plot............... 4-51, 4-53, 4-55
Slope.. 4-29, 4-46, 4-77, 4-81, 6-49, U

6-53, 6-54, 8-11
Unidirectional ........................4-114
Social security ................4-11, 4-20
UPC/EAN ................................. 1-7
Solar month ........................... 4-122
Urine ......................................... 3-3
Stat sample........... 1-4, 3-9, 4-5, 4-7
Urine diluent ............. 1-4, 1-17, 4-7
Statistics...... 1-20, 4-47, 4-68, 4-69,
4-70, 4-71, 4-72, 4-73, 4-108, User information ....................4-109
4-109
Username ............ 3-5, 4-127, 4-128
Statistics by sender ................ 4-109
Utilities.... 1-20, 4-57, 4-116, 4-117,
Statistics by tester .................. 4-109 4-119, 4-120, 4-121, 4-122,
4-123, 4-124, 6-4, 6-53
Substrate 4-78, 4-101, 7-2, 8-5, 8-8,
8-9, 8-10 V
Substrate depleted.................. 4-101 Virtual sample disk.................... 1-5
Symbology................................. 1-7 W
Syringe plunger assembly.5-3, 5-26 Wash solution....... 5, 3-2, 4-89, 5-2,

5-17
System reset...... 5-3, 5-4, 5-8, 5-10,
5-11, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21, 5-35, Wash solution a ...... 1-13, 1-15, 3-2,
5-39, 5-41, 5-43 5-17
System status area ................. 1-19 Wash solution b .............. 1-13, 1-15
T Wash unit............... 1-15, 5-24, 6-42
Tabular statistics ...................... 4-47 Washing position......................1-13
Template Modifying Software . B-1, Waste outlet............................... 3-3

B-4, B-5
Water blank ..............................4-62
Test No................................... 4-113
Water supply ...................... 2-3, 2-4
Test order ................................. 4-91
Water tank ................. 1-13, 3-3, 5-4
Test report.............................. 4-108
Water unit.................................. 5-4
Test result statistics................ 4-109
Westgard multi-rule....... 4-51, 4-53,
Tester ........... 4-11, 4-20, 4-68, 4-71 4-55, 4-84
Three-wire power cord .............. 2-2 Working hour . 4-116, 4-119, 4-120,
4-124
Throughput ............................... A-1
Working page area.................1-20
T-piece .............5-3, 5-27, 5-28, C-1
Workload............. 4-68, 4-71, 4-109
Triple-reagent ..... 8-3, 8-4, 8-7, 8-8,
8-11, 8-12 Z
Tungsten-halogen lamp ... 1-16, A-2 Zero-order reaction ................... 8-8
Turbidity .........................4-86, 8-19

P/N: BA40-20-73075(1.5)

BS-400 Operation Manual Eng (v1.5)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-400 Operation Manual Eng (v1.5)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-400

Intellectual Property Statement

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Please keep this manual properly for convenient use.

Who Should Read This Manual

 Perform daily operating tasks;

What Can You Find in This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual

Bold font indicates a chapter title, such as 5 Service and Maintenance

When you see… Then…

Read the statement following the symbol. The

Read the statement following the symbol. The

Labels Used On the System

CE marking. The device is fully in conformity with the Council

Authorized Representative in the European Community

The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU

In Vitro diagnostic equipment

Biohazard warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection

Warning: Risk of personal injury or equipment damage

Warning: risk of burn

Protective ground terminal

OFF (Main Power)

Preventing Electric Shock

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp

Handling Reagents and Wash Solution

Treating Waste Liquids

Preventing Fire or Explosion

Operating the System

Reagents, Calibrators and Controls

Computer and Printer

The system is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer

1.1 Hardware Introduction

1 System Description 1-1

 The analyzing unit is composed of the measurement system, sample/reagent

 The operation unit is a personal computer, on which the operating software is

 The output unit is a printer used to print out patient reports.

 The accessories and consumables include reaction cuvettes, photometer lamp,

1.1.1 Analyzing Unit

 Sample disk assembly

1-2 1 System Description

Sample Mixer Wash Unit Reagent Mixer

Front Right Door

Figure1-3 Rear View

 DEIONIZED WATER: Connector for deionized water tubing;

1 System Description 1-3

Network Interface Serial Port Power Jack

 Network interface: Used to connect a network cable;

1.1.1.1 Sample Disk Assembly

Figure1-5 Sample Disk

Sample Loading Indicator

 Routine samples: 1-60;

1-4 1 System Description

4) D3 (No.89) for alkaline wash solution;

5) W (No.90): for distilled water

Virtual sample disk: Up to 6 virtual sample disks are allowed.

 Microtube: Φ12×37mm, Φ14×25mm;

To remove the sample disk,

 Loosen the two retaining screws on the sample disk;

To install the sample disk,

1.1.1.2 Sample Dispenser

Figure1-6 Sample Dispenser

1 System Description 1-5

Figure1-7 Sample Syringe

Perform daily operating tasks;

The analyzing unit is composed of the measurement system, sample/reagent

The operation unit is a personal computer, on which the operating software is

The output unit is a printer used to print out patient reports.

The accessories and consumables include reaction cuvettes, photometer lamp,

Sample disk assembly

DEIONIZED WATER: Connector for deionized water tubing;

Network interface: Used to connect a network cable;

Routine samples: 1-60;

Microtube: Φ12×37mm, Φ14×25mm;

Loosen the two retaining screws on the sample disk;

Chemical tests: 2µl-45µL in the increment of 0.1µL;

The reagent disk rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, carrying the specified

Each reagent position (R1/R2/R3/R4) can be shared by any reagent type of

Loosen the two retaining screws on the reagent disk;

The reaction disk is single-circled and can hold 90 semi-permanent plastic

Reaction volume: 150µl-360µl.

Reaction temperature: 37℃.

A liquid level detector is designed to sense the level of high-concentration waste.

The sample mixer starts to work once sample is dispensed.

For quadruple-reagent test, the reagent mixer starts to work once R4 is

Cuvette blank correction: Water blank is measured to check the background of